Search filter

Operating and code number keypad Toplock CTS V, CTS BV CTI, CTI B

Operating and Installation Instructions Code Number Keypad Toplock CTS V, CTS BV Keypad with separate evaluating processor unit CTI, CTI B With relay which is integrated in the keypad GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21-29, 71229 Leonberg Phone +49 7152-203-0, Fax +49 7152-203-310 Material no. 129510 Number of rev. 00, Drawing no. 21207-9-0963 Subject to change Description of function The code number keypads are code switching devices which accept up to … different open codes. Each code activates the same potential-free relay output. Via the keypad, up to … code numbers, each a maximum of … digits, are entered with a master code. Once the data has been entered, it will remain stored, even in the case of a power failure. Subsequent to entering the valid open code and pressing the key with the bell symbol, the green LED lights up on the keypad and the relay is activated for approx. … seconds. If the red LED lights up during the code entry an incorrect code has been entered. The red LED goes out after a few seconds. Only then can a new code be entered. If an incorrect code has been entered … consecutive times, the keypad blocks for one minute. CTI, CTI B The device only consists of the keypad. CTS V, CTS BV The device consists of … parts: The keypad and the decoder. The keypad and the decoder are in sync as a pair with one key number. Only keypads and decoders with the same key number can work together. Programming the Devices … Programming a new open code … Press the key “P”. The red LED starts to blink. … Enter the valid master code (see also “Master Code Factory Setting”). … Press the key with the bell symbol. The green LED starts to blink, the red one goes out. (If the red LED is continuously lit up or continues to blink and the green LED does not blink, the entered master code was incorrect. Wait until no LED is lit up and try again.) … Enter the new open code … Enter the number of the storage location (1 – 5) where you want to store the open code. … Press the key with the bell symbol. The green LED goes out and the new open code is now saved under the selected number. Important! Since the number of digits of the open code which is saved under storage location no. … defines the number of valid digits of the open codes which are saved under the storage locations no. … – 5, it must be entered first. The number of digits of the open code which is saved under storage location no. … must be the same for the other open codes. Example: You want to save open code 4711 under the storage location no. 2: Enter the digit sequence: 4711 … If an open code which has been saved under a certain storage location is to be made invalid the corresponding storage location must be overwritten with the new open code. … Programming a new master code … Press the key “P”. The red LED starts to blink. … Enter the valid master code (see also “Master Code Factory Setting”). … Press the key with the bell symbol. The green LED starts to blink, the red LED goes out. If the red LED is continuously lit up or continues to blink and the green LED does not blink the entered master code was incorrect. Wait until no LED is illuminated and try again. … Press the key “P”. The red and the green LED blink. … Enter the new master code … Press the key with the bell symbol. The red and the green LEDs go out and the new master code has been saved. … Programming the Key Number (only for CTS V, CTS BV) The key number can be found in the decoder. … Press the key “P”. The red LED starts to blink. … Enter the valid master code (see also “Master Code Factory Setting”). … Press the key with the bell symbol. The green LED starts to blink, the red LED goes out. If the red LED is continuously lit up or continues to blink and the green LED does not blink the entered master code was incorrect. Wait until no LED is lit up and try again. … Press the key “P”. The red and the green LED blink. … Press the key “P”. The green LED goes out and only the red LED is still blinking. … Enter the 5-digit key number (zeros which are placed in front must also be entered). … Press the key with the bell symbol. The red LED goes out and the key number is now saved. … Reset to Factory Setting … Interrupt operating voltage. … .1 Hold a magnet against key … of the square keypad or key … of the long keypad and reconnect the operating voltage at the same time. The red LED lights up and the green LED blinks briefly. As a result, CTS V, CTS BV has been reset to the factory setting. Important! At the time of switching-on, the magnet must be on the keypad. If the magnet is held against the keypad when the operating voltage is still on only the red LED lights up, but the keypad is not reset. This way, you can also find the correct position for the magnet. CTI, CTI B: Attention! During reset, all programmed open codes and the master code are cleared. After the reset, the factory setting applies. CTS V, CTS BV: First of all, the key number must be programmed to guarantee the function of the keypad with the decoder. Only then, the open codes and the master code are to be reprogrammed. For security reasons, it is very important to change the factory setting again. Factory setting master code: 11111 Factory setting open code: 1234 … Pin Assignment: CTS V, CTS BV Evaluating processor unit Keypad Attention!!! Disconnect the device from the power for any installation work … Pin Assignment: CTI CTI B Relay Relay Attention!!! Disconnect the devices from the power for any installation work. GEZE GmbH P.O. Box 1363 71226 Leonberg Germany GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Str. 21-29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel. +49 (0)71 52-203-0 Fax +49 (0)71 52-203-310 GEZE Online: www.geze.com GEZE Branches Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord/Ost Bühringstr.8 13086 Berlin (Weissensee) Tel. +49(0)30-47 89 90-0 Fax. +49(0)30-47 89 90-17 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Nordsternstraße 65 45329 Essen Tel. +49(0)201-830 82-0 Fax. +49(0)201-830 82-20 E-Mail: essen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte Adenauerallee … 61440 Oberursel (b. Frankfurt) Tel. +49(0)61 71-6 36 10-0 Fax. +49(0)61 71-6 36 10-1 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21-29 71229 Leonberg Tel. +49(0)7152-203-594 Fax. +49(0)7152-203-438 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com Subsidiaries Germany GEZE Sonderkonstruktionen GmbH Planken … 97944 Boxberg-Schweigern Tel. +49(0)7930-92 94-0 Fax. +49(0)7930-92 94-10 E-Mail: sk.de@geze.com GEZE SERVICE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Str.25 71229 Leonberg Tel. +49(0)7152-92 33-0 Fax. +49(0)7152-92 33-60 E-Mail: info@geze-service.com Asia Europe GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Shuangchenzhong Road Beichen Economic Development Area (BEDA) Tianjin 300400, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0) 22-26 97 39 95-0 Fax. +86 (0) 22-26 97 27 02 E-Mail: sales-info@geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L ZAC de l’Orme Rond RN 19 77170 Servon Tel. +33 (0) … 60 62 60 70 Fax. +33 (0) … 60 62 60 71 E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai Room 3010 Tower 2, Grand Gateway No. … HongQiao Road, XuHui District 200030 Shanghai, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0) 21 64475908 Fax. +86 (0) 21 64472007 E-Mail: gezesh@geze.com.cn Great Britain GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou Room 17C3 Everbright Bank Building, No.689, Tian He Bei Road 510630 Guangzhou, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0) 20 3873842 Fax. +86 (0) 20 38731834 E-Mail: gezegz@geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing No. 6-32 Building Jili Avenue Daxing District 100076 Beijing, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0) 10 87965152 Tel. +86 (0) 10 87975178 Fax. +86 (0) 10 87971476 E-Mail: gezebj@geze.com.cn Italy GEZE Italia Srl Via Giotto … 20040 Cambiago (MI) Tel. +39 (0) 02 95 06 95-11 Fax. +39 (0) 02 95 06 95-33 E-Mail: italia.it@geze.it DCLSA Distributors (Pty) Ltd. 1027 Richards Drive, Midrand P.O. Box 7934, Midrand 1685 South Africa Tel. ++27 11 3158286 Fax. ++27 11 31558261 E-Mail: info@dclsa.co.za Middle East U.A.E. GEZE Middle East P.O. Box 17903 Jebel Ali Free Zone Dubai Tel. +971 (0) … 88 33 112 Fax. +971 (0) … 88 33 240 E-Mail: geze@emirates.net.ae Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG Bodenackerstr. 79 4657 Dulliken Tel. +41 (0) 62-285 54 00 Fax. +41 (0) 62-285 54 01 E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com Spain / Portugal GEZE Iberia S.R.L. Pol.Ind. El Pla C/Comerc, 2-22, Nave 12 08980 Sant Feliu de Llobregat (Barcelona) Tel. +34 (0) … 02 19 40 36 Fax. +34 (0) … 02 19 40 35 E-Mail: info@geze.es Scandinavia GEZE Engineering Roma Srl Via Lucrezia Romana 91 00178 Roma Tel. +39 (0) 06 72 65 31 … Fax. +39 (0) 06 72 65 31 36 E-Mail: roma@geze.biz Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. Industrieterrein Kapelbeemd Leemkuil … 5626 EA Eindhoven Tel. +31 (0) 40 26 29 08 … Fax. +31 (0) 40 26 29 08 … E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com South Africa GEZE SERVICE GmbH Niederlassung Berlin Bühringstr.8 13086 Berlin (Weissensee) Tel. +49(0)30-47 02 17-30 Fax. +49(0)30-47 02 17-33 Yourattentionisdrawntothe “productliabilitylaw“definedliabilityto themanu-facturerforhisproducts whicharecon-tainedinthemain catalogue(productinformation,usage, misuses,productactivity,product maintenance,thedutytoinformandthe dutytoinstruct).Noncompliancewith theseconditionsre-lievesthe manufacturerfromanyliability. GEZE UK Ltd. Blenheim Way Fradley Park Lichfield Staffordshire WS13 8SY Tel. +44 (0) 15 43 44 30 00 Fax. +44 (0) 15 43-44 30 01 E-Mail: info@geze-uk.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp. z o.o. Ul. Annopol 21 03-236 Warszawa Tel. +48 (0) 22 440 44 40 Fax. +48 (0) 22 440 44 00 E-Mail: geze@geze.pl Austria GEZE Austria GmbH Mayrwiesstraße 12 5300 Hallwang b. Salzburg Tel. +43 (0) 662 66 31 42 Fax. +43 (0) 662 66 31 42-15 E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB Mallslingan 10 Box 7060 18711 Täby Tel. +46 (0) 8-732 34-00 Fax. +46 (0) 8-732 34-99 E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge Postboks 63 2081 Eidsvoll Tel. +47 (0) 639 572 00 Fax. +47 (0) 639 571 73 E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com Finland GEZE Finland Branch office of GEZE Scandinavia AB Postbox 20 Herralantie 824 15871 Hollola Tel. +358 (0) 10-400 5100 Fax. +358 (0) 10-400 5120 E-Mail: finland.se@geze.com Denmark GEZE Denmark Branch office of GEZE Scandinavia AB Høje Taastrup Boulevard 53 DK - 2630 Taastrup Tel. +45 46-32 33 24 Fax. +45 46-32 33 26 E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com GEZE Representative: Id. No. 129510 Modification level 00 • Drawing No.. 21207-9-0963 • Printed in Germany • Subject to change without notice The hallmark DIN ISO 9001 of our enterprise

Program timer SC28.21 pro

Bedienungsanleitung D Schaltcomputer / Elektronische Schaltuhr müller SC 18.x0 easy / SC 28.x1 pro4 1. Sicherheitshinweise … Kanal … Kanal Anschlussbilder 3. Technische Daten Anschlussspannung Kontaktwerkstoff (115V / 230V) Kontaktwerkstoff (12V / 24V) Schutzart Umgebungstemperatur Wirkungsweise Verschmutzungsgrad Bemessungsstoßspannung Standard CFL, LED Siehe Gerät AgSnO2 AgNi IP 20 nach DIN EN 60529 -30°…+55° … BSTU … 4 kV DIN EN 60730-1/DIN EN 60730-2-7 Geeignet für moderne Leuchtmittel paladin 170 4x0 easy / 172 4x1 pro4 / 173 110 easy 2. Erstinbetriebnahme ! Einbau und Montage dürfen nur von einer Elektrofachkraft durchgeführt werden! Anderenfalls besteht Brandgefahr oder die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages! ! Nur an die auf dem Typenschild angegebene Spannung und Frequenz anschließen! ! Bei Eingriffen oder Änderungen an der Schaltuhr erlischt die Garantie! ! Die Schaltuhr ist so zu installieren, dass außergewöhnlich hohe Störstrahlung die Funktion nicht beeinträchtigen kann! Schaltuhr wird im Power-Fail-Modus ausgeliefert. Das Display ist  Die aus.  Drücken Sie die / Taste. Die Displayanzeige erscheint. Schaltuhr ist mit dem aktuellen Datum, der Uhrzeit und der  Die europäischen Sommerzeitregel voreingestellt. Sie die gewünschte Sprache mit den -Tasten ein und  Stellen bestätigen Sie mit . (Hinweis: Mit der -Taste können Sie jederzeit einen Schritt zurück) Uhrzeit und Sommerzeitregel falls nötig mit den  Datum, einstellen und jeweils mit bestätigen. 4. Service 5. Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung 6. Batterie Hugo Müller GmbH & Co KG Karlstraße 90 DE-78054 VS-Schwenningen +49 7720 80836 www.hugo-mueller.de Das Gerät ist zur Verwendung für folgende Aufgaben vorgesehen: Beleuchtungen im privaten und gewerblichen Bereich, Straßen- und Schaufensterbeleuchtung, Steuerung von Lüftungen, Motoren, Pumpen, Anlagen und Anwesenheitssimulation etc.. Das Gerät ist ausschließlich zum Einsatz in trockenen Räumen geeignet. Das Gerät ist nicht geeignet für sicherheitsrelevante Aufgaben, wie z.B. Fluchttüren, Brandschutzeinrichtungen etc. Verteilereinbau-Produkt: 7. Funktionsübersicht -Tasten 8. Symbolerklärung Kanal eingeschaltet / Programmierung EIN Kanal ausgeschaltet / Programmierung AUS erm Für das aktuelle Datum ist eine Ferien- / Datums-Schaltung aktiv. Aktueller Schaltzustand beruht auf einer programmierten Standardschaltzeit. erm I Akt. Schaltzustand beruht auf manueller Umschaltung des Programms und wird durch das gespeicherte Programm bei der nächsten Schaltzeit geändert. Akt. Schaltzustand beruht auf manueller Umschaltung und bleibt permanent erhalten, bis manuell zurückgesetzt wird. Wochentage Montag ... Sonntag; im Programmier-Modus zeigen Unterstriche an, welche Wochentage aktiviert sind. Aktueller Schaltzustand beruht auf einer Impuls-Schalzeit Schaltuhr ist über PIN gesperrt; PIN-Eingabe erforderlich. 9. Schaltzeit programmieren OK OK OK OK OK OK **Bei … KanalAusführung OK OK OK OK Automatik Modus erm 10. Tastenfunktion 11. Permanent / Zusatz-Schaltzeiten 1. Wechsel vom Automatik-Modus in den Eingabe-Modus. 2. Zurück-Funktion (Eine Ebene zurück). 1. Eingabe-Modus: Auswahlmöglichkeit zwischen verschiedenen Optionen . 2. Eingabe-Modus: Verändern der blinkenden Stelle.  Permanent Ein / Aus  Zyklus optional zuschaltbar h:mm:ss Einzeit (0:00:01 … 9:59:59) h:mm:ss Pause (0:00:01 … 9:59:59)  Zusatz-Schaltzeiten optional zuschaltbar 1. Automatik-Modus: Ein- oder Ausschalten eines Kanals bis zur nächsten programmierten Schaltzeit. 2. Automatik-Modus: Tastendruck länger als … sec. = Permanentschaltung / 12. Zyklus / Zufall (1)  Zufall optional zuschaltbar Nein Ja 1. Aktivieren der Schaltuhr durch Betätigen einer der Tasten (Ohne Netzspannung). 2. Bestätigen der Auswahl oder der Programmierung (Eine Ebene tiefer). 13. Weitere Einstellungen 14. Impuls Menu-Punkt Hauptmenu Anwendungen Programm -> Neu -> Kanal A/B -> … Programm Abfrage Programm Abfrage Schaltzeiten / Abfrage Speicherplatz Programm Löschen Programm Kanäle, einen Kanal oder einzelne Schaltzeiten zu löschen. Datum-Zeit Einstellungen Einstellung Datum und Uhrzeit Die Impuls-Funktion bietet Ihnen die Möglichkeit eine Einschaltzeit mit festgelegter Schaltdauer zu programmieren. Die Uhr schaltet nach der programmierten Impuls-Dauer (Impuls bis zu 59:59 mm:ss) wieder aus. Die Programmierung erfolgt entsprechend einer normalen Standard Schaltzeit mit folgenden Unterschieden: Wählen Sie die Impuls-Funktion. Legen Sie die Einschaltdauer fest ( Impuls Minute / Impuls Sekunde). Legen Sie die Wochentage Ihrer Impuls-Schaltzeit fest Legen Sie die Einschaltzeit fest ( Zeit Stunde / Zeit Minute) Sommerzeit Sprache Werkseinstellungen Einstellungen Sommerzeiteinstellungen Einstellungen Sprachauswahl Einstellungen Zurücksetzen auf Auslieferungszustand Löschen der Schaltzeit(en). Sie haben die Möglichkeiten alle Zähler Optionen PIN-Code Optionen     15. Programmierung über NFC (1) 16. Programmierung über Bluetooth (1) Anzeige der Betriebsstunden und Schaltungen je Kanal und für die Schaltuhr gesamt Sie können die Schaltuhr mit einem 4-stelligen PIN-Code sperren. Diesen Code können Sie bearbeiten, aktivieren oder deaktivieren. Sollten Sie ihn vergessen haben, wenden Sie sich bitte an unseren Kundendienst. Zusatz-Schaltzeiten: Programm -> Neue Schaltzeit -> Kanal A/B -> Zusatz Schaltzeit -> … Zusatzschaltzeiten ermöglichen Ihnen einzelne Schaltzeiten nach Datum zu programmieren. (1) Option www.hugo-mueller.de BA SC18x0easy SC28x1pro4 MP;de,en,fr,it -23692- 2019.07V05 Instruction Manual GB Time switch müller SC 18.x0 easy / SC 28.x1 pro4 Connection diagram 1. Safety instructions ! … channels … channel ! 3. Technical data  The time switch is delivered in sleep-mode, the display is switched off.  Press -/ button to wake it up. current date and time is already programmed and European daylight  The savings time is activated. Connect the supply voltage/frequency as stated  Select the desired language by pressing -buttons and confirm it by pressing on the product label! . (Remark: By pressing you move one step backwards from the current The installation and assembly of electrical equipment must be only carried out only by a skilled Person! Otherwise fire danger or danger of an electric shock exists! See device AgSnO2 AgNi IP 20 to DIN EN 60529 -30°…+55° … BSTU … 4 kV DIN EN 60730-1/DIN EN 60730-2-7 Ideal for modern lamps position) ! Warranty void if housing opened by unauthorised person! ! The electronic circuit is protected against a wide range of external influences. Incorrect operating may occur if external influences exceed certain limits! 4. Service Supply voltage Contact material (115V / 230V) Contact material (12V / 24V) Type of protection Permitted ambiet temperature Mode of oeration Degree of contamination Rated surge voltage Standard CFL, LED paladin 170 4x0 easy / 172 4x1 pro4 / 173 110 easy 2. Initial operation Hugo Müller GmbH & Co KG Karlstraße 90 DE-78054 VS-Schwenningen +49 7720 80836 www.hugo-mueller.de 7. Menu overview required, date, time and daylight savings time mode can be adjusted also by  Ifpressing -buttons and a subsequent confirmation with . 5. Intended use 6. Battery The device fits for the particular use of the following tasks: Illumination of private and industrial areas, street and shop-window lightening, regulation of air conditioning, flushing, motors, pumps, plants and machinery as well as to simulate presence etc. Operate the device in a dry room only! The installation must be in accordance with the instruction manual. The device is not qualified for security relevant tasks such as emergency doors, fire protection equipment DIN-rail mounting product: 8. Symbol legend Channel is switched ON Channel is switched OFF erm For the current date the “holiday program” / “permanent by date” is activated Standard programming step Current state is based on a manual over-ride. The state will be cancelled with the next programming step. erm I Current state is based on a manual over-ride. The state is permanent until terminated manuall. Days of the week Monday, Tuesday, ... Sunday; The underscores indicate if the program is active for the days above. Current state is based on a switching time with pulse function The time switch is locked; to unlock the device the PIN has to be entered . 9. New Program OK OK OK OK OK OK **At … channel version OK OK OK OK Automatic Mode erm 10. Key function 11. Permanent / Extra switching times  Permanent On / Off 1. To access the Enter-mode (program, adjustments, options) from the automatic-mode. 2. To revert to the beginning of the current (sub-) menu. 1. To adjust the flashing digit. 2. To scroll through a choice 12. Cycle / Random (1)  Cycle optionally selectable h:mm:ss on-time (0:00:01 … 9:59:59) h:mm:ss off-time (0:00:01 … 9:59:59)  Extra switching times optionally selectable 1. Automatic-mode: To switch the channel ON or OFF until the next programming step occurs. 2. Automatic-mode: A push longer than … sec. = Permanent switching status.  Random optionally selectable no / yes 1. To activate the time switch when operated without power supply. 2. To confirm the selection or the entered data. 13. Additional adjustments 14. Pulse Menu Main menu Application Program query Summertime Language To query the programming steps and remaining memory locations The pulse function provides you the opportunity of programming a switching time with a defined duration. As soon as the pulse-duration has expired the time switch switches OFF automatically (the duration of the pulse is up to 59:59 mm:ss). Deletion of switching time(s). The program for all channels, single The programming is carried out like a standard switching time (see point … / 9) with fo llowing differences Program channels and single programming steps within on channel can be Choose Pulse function (9F). deleted. Define the duration of the pulse ( pulstime minute / pulstime second). Program the days of the week Adjustment Adjustment of date and time Program the switching time ( time hour / time minute) Validation: Confirm the blinking summary of the pulse program 15. Programming via NFC (1) 16. Programming via Bluetooth (1) Adjustment Adjustment of the daylight saving time mode (ON/OFF) Adjustment Choice of languages Factory Defaults Adjustment Reset to the state of delivery. Counter Options PIN-Code Options Program delete Date-Time Program -> New program -> Channel A/B -> … Program      Displays the hour counter and pulse counter for each channel and the time switch itself. The time switch can be locked with a 4-digit PIN-Code. The code can be adjusted, activated and deactivated. If you have forgotten the Code please call customer service. Extra switching time: Program -> new program -> channel A/B -> Extra switching time -> … These programming steps are single switching times by date. (1) Option www.hugo-mueller.de BA SC18x0easy SC28x1pro4 MP;de,en,fr,it -23692- 2019.07V05 Mode d´emploi F Interrupteur horaire müller SC 18.x0 easy / SC 28.x1 pro4 Schéma de raccordement 1. Instructions de sécurité ! … channels … channel ! ! ! 3. caractéristiques  A sa fourniture, l´interrupteur horaire est à l´état de veille, l´affiche ur est etteint.  Actionner la touche ./ pour activer l´appareil.  La date et l´heure correspondent à la règle européenne pour l´horaire d´été. et valider avec . Strictement respecter les indications de tension  Sélectionner le langage souhaité avec les touches (Remarque:Avec la touche vous pouvez toujours revenir un pas en arrière) et de fréquence mentionnées sur la plaque sélectionner la date, l´heure et la règle pour l´horaire d´été avec d´identité!  Silesnécessaire touches et valider en actionnant . L´ installation et le montage ne doivent être effectués que par les électriciens! Sinon il y a danger d´incendie ou d´électrocution. Aucun droit de garantie en cas de manipulations et de modifications de l´appareil. L´interrupteur est à installer de telle façon que celui-ci ne soit pas soumis aux rayonnements pertubateurs pouvant nuire à sa fonction. 4. Service Supply voltage Contact material (115V / 230V) Contact material (12V / 24V) Type of protection Permitted ambiet temperature Mode of oeration Degree of contamination Rated surge voltage Standard CFL, LED See device AgSnO2 AgNi IP 20 to DIN EN 60529 -30°…+55° … BSTU … 4 kV DIN EN 60730-1/DIN EN 60730-2-7 Ideal for modern lamps paladin 170 4x0 easy / 172 4x1 pro4 / 173 110 easy 2. Mise en service Hugo Müller GmbH & Co KG Karlstraße 90 DE-78054 VS-Schwenningen +49 7720 80836 www.hugo-mueller.de 7. Sommaire des fonctions 5. utilisation prévue 6. Battery The device fits for the particular use of the following tasks: Illumination of private and industrial areas, street and shop-window lightening, regulation of air conditioning, flushing, motors, pumps, plants and machinery as well as to simulate presence etc. Operate the device in a dry room only! The installation must be in accordance with the instruction manual. The device is not qualified for security relevant tasks such as emergency doors, fire protection equipment DIN-rail mounting product: 8. Légende des symboles Canal marche Canal arrêt erm Un programme vacances ou daté est activé pour la date actuelle. L´état actuel est basé sur un horaire de commutation standard. erm I L´état actuel est issu d´une commutation manuelle. Cet état sera modifié par le program me à la prochaine commutation. L´état actuel est basé sur une commutation manuelle. Cet état sera modifié p ar la prochaine action manuelle. Jours de semaine lundi … dimanche; les jours soulignés sont activés. L´état actuel correspond à une commutation par impulsion. L´interrupteur horaire est verrouillé; la connaissance du PIN est indispensable pour déverrouiller l´appareil . 9. Programmer une commutation OK OK OK OK OK OK **At … channel version OK OK OK OK Automatic Mode erm 10. Fonction des touches 11. Permanent / Commutation supplement  Permanent Marche / Arret 1. Passage du mode automatique au mode entrée de données. 2. Fonction un pas en arrière 1. Mode entrée de données: Sélection de plusieurs options. 2. Mode entrée de données: déplacement de la position clignotante.  Cycle sélection optionelle h:mm:ss Fermeture (0:00:01 … 9:59:59) h:mm:ss Pause (0:00:01 … 9:59:59)  Commutation supplement sélection optionelle 1. Mode automatique: Marche/arrêt d´un canal jusqu´à la prochaine commutation programmée. 2. Mode automatique : Touche actionnée plus de … secondes = état permanent. / 12. Cycle / Random (1)  Random sélection optionelle non oui 1. Activer l´interrupteur en actionnant la touche pendant plus de … seconde (appareil hors -tension) 2. Valider la sélection ou la programmation. 13. Autres réglages 14. Impulsion Menu principal Menu Applications Programme -> Nouveau programme -> Canal A/B -> … Heure d été Langage La fonction impulsion permet de réaliser une commutation de durée determinée. A la fin de l´impulsion( Impulsion jusqu´à 59:59 mm:ss ), l´interrupteur horaire revient automatiquement à sa position initiale. Programme Heures de commutation / nombre de pas de programme La programmation est effectuée comme pour une commutation standard (voir point … / 9) avec les dérogations suivantes: Permet d´effacer le programme sur tous les canaux, ou sur un seul Programme canal ou seulement des pas de programme. Sélectionner la fonction Impulsion (9F). Déterminer la durée d´enclenchement ( impulsion minute / impulsion seconde). Programmer les jours de semaine Réglages Programmation de la date et de l´heure Programmer l´heure d´enclenchement ( Horaire heure / Horaire minute) Contrôle: Valider la commutation par impulsion clignotante 15. Programmation avec NFC (1) 16. Programmation avec Bluetooth (1) Réglages Réglage de l´horaire été / hiver Réglages Choix du langage Réglages usine Réglages Compteur Options PIN-Code Options Programme demande Programme effacer Date-Heure      Remise à zero, c´est à dire retour à l´état de livraison. Affichage des heures de marche et du nombre de commutations pour chaque canal et affichage du total de l´interrupteur horaire L´interrupteur horaire peut être verrouillé grâce à un code PIN de … chiffres. Ce code peut être modifié, activé ou désactivé. En cas d´oubli ou de perte de ce code, contacter notre service àprèsvente. Heures de commutation supplémentaires : Programme -> nouveau programme -> Canal A/B -> Heure de commutation supplément. -> … La fonction « heures de commutation supplémentaires » permet de réaliser des commutations uniques affectées à une date. (1) Options www.hugo-mueller.de BA SC18x0easy SC28x1pro4 MP;de,en,fr,it -23692- 2019.07V05 Manuale di istruzione I Interruttore orario müller SC 18.x0 easy / SC 28.x1 pro4 Schema di collegamento 1. Consigli per l’installazione ! … channels … channel ! 3. Specificazioni ! dispositivo è impostato nella modalità STAND-BY ed il display è  Ilspento.  Premere il tasto / . data e l’ora corrente sono già impostate con le impostazioni  La Collegare l’apparecchiatura rispettando le indicazioni di europee per il risparmio energetico tensione e frequenza indicate sul prodotto Selezionare la lingua desiderata premendo i tasti e confermare Se manomesso o modificato da personale non autorizzato,  premendo il tasto . (Attenzione: Premendo ci si sposta dalla L’installazione ed il montaggio delle apparecchiature elettriche deve essere eseguito da personale esperto. Vi è un pericolo di infiammabilità e shock elettrico. la Garanzia non ha effetto! ! See device AgSnO2 AgNi IP 20 to DIN EN 60529 -30°…+55° … BSTU … 4 kV DIN EN 60730-1/DIN EN 60730-2-7 Ideal for modern lamps posizione corrente a quella precedente) necessario, data, ora e la modalità del risparmio energetico  Se possono essere impostate premendo i tasti confermando Il circuito elettronico del dispositivo è protetto contro un’ampia gamma di distrurbi. Tuttavia, disturbi di livelli elevati potrebbero non far funzionare correttamente il dispositivo. 4. Service Supply voltage Contact material (115V / 230V) Contact material (12V / 24V) Type of protection Permitted ambiet temperature Mode of oeration Degree of contamination Rated surge voltage Standard CFL, LED paladin 170 4x0 easy / 172 4x1 pro4 / 173 110 easy 2. Impostazioni iniziali Hugo Müller GmbH & Co KG Karlstraße 90 DE-78054 VS-Schwenningen +49 7720 80836 www.hugo-mueller.de 7. Descrizione del menù successivamente con il tasto . 5. Destinazione d'uso 6. Battery The device fits for the particular use of the following tasks: Illumination of private and industrial areas, street and shop-window lightening, regulation of air conditioning, flushing, motors, pumps, plants and machinery as well as to simulate presence etc. Operate the device in a dry room only! The installation must be in accordance with the instruction manual. The device is not qualified for security relevant tasks such as emergency doors, fire protection equipment DIN-rail mounting product: 8. Descrizione dei simboli Canale commutato nello stato ON Canale commutato nello stato OFF erm Funzionamento in modalità “programma vacanze” Funzionamento in base alla programmazione inserita Forzatura manuale. L’impostazione sarà modificata con il programma successivo. erm I Forzatura manuale. Lo stato permanente rimarrà fino al ripristino manuale. Giorni della settimana Lunedì, Martedì, …Domenica; Il trattino sotto il numero indica che quel giorno è programmato. E’ attiva una commutazione con la funzione Impulso Il dispositivo è bloccato; per sbloccarlo occorre digitare il codice PIN. 9. Nuovo programma OK OK OK OK OK OK **At … channel version OK OK OK OK Modo Automático erm 10. Descrizione tasti-funzione 11. Aggiungi programma / Fisso On / Off  Fisso On / Off 1. Per accedere al menù (programma, impostazioni, opzioni) dalla modalità automatica. 2. Per tornare indietro, alla posizione precedente del menù . 1. Per impostare il dato che lampeggia 2. Per scorrere una selezionare selezionabile facoltativamente h:mm:ss Puntuale (0:00:01 … 9:59:59) h:mm:ss Pausa (0:00:01 … 9:59:59)  Aggiungi programma selezionabile facoltativamente 1. Modalità automatica: commuta il canale in ON o OFF fino all’intervento del programma successivo. 2. Modalità automatica: premuto per … sec. = commuta nello stato permanente. / 12. Ciclo / Casuali (1)  Ciclo  Casuali selezionabile facoltativamente no si 1. Per attivare il display quando si opera senza alimentazione. 2. Per confermare la selezione o il dato inserito. 13. Impostazioni aggiuntive 14. Impulso Menù principale Menu Applicazione Programma -> Nuovo programma -> Canale A/B -> … Ora legale Lingua La funzione impulso permette di impostare una programmazione con una durata di tempo specifica. Programma Per verificare le programmazioni e le posizioni di memoria libere Terminato l’impulso, il dispositivo commuta automaticamente in OFF (la durata dell’impulso arriva al massimo a 59:59 mm:ss). Per la programmazione, vedere i punti … / … prestando attenzione alle seguenti differenze Cancella le programmazioni. Il programma per tutti i canali, singoli Programma canali e singole programmazioni, inserite all’interno del canale. Scegliere la funzione Impulso (9F). Definire la durata dell’impulso ( Impulso minuti / Impulso secondi). Programmare i giorni della settimana Impostazioni Impostazione della data e dell’ora Impostare l’orario per la commutazione ( Ora ore / Ora minuti) Conferma: confermare il dato lampeggiante 15. Programmazione con NFC (1) 16. Programmazione con Bluetooth (1) Impostazioni Impostazione dell’ora legale (ON/OFF) Impostazioni Scelta della lingua Impostazioni predefinite Impostazioni Ripristina le impostazioni iniziali. Programma Verifica Programma Elimina Data-Ora      Contatore Opzioni PIN Opzioni Visualizza le ore e le commutazioni per ogni canale Il dispositivo può essere bloccato con un codice PIN a 4cifre. Il codice può essere impostato, attivato e disattivato. In caso ci si dimenticasse del PIN, occorre chiamare il servizio clienti Commutazioni Extra: -> -> -> Aggiungi Programma -> … Questi punti di programmazione sono singole commutazioni tramite data . (1) Opzioni www.hugo-mueller.de BA SC18x0easy SC28x1pro4 MP;de,en,fr,it -23692- 2019.07V05

Installation instructions GEZE SecuLogic FTV 320 escape door lock

DE | Deutsch Produktbeschreibung EN | English Product description Die Fluchttürverriegelung FTV 320 ist Bestandteil des GEZE SecuLogic Rettungswegsystems und dient der Steuerung und Überwachung von elektrisch verriegelten Türen im Verlauf von Flucht-und Rettungswegen. Nach berechtigter Freischaltung oder durch Drücken der Nottaste der GEZE Türzentralen TZ 300 / TZ 320 entriegelt der FTV 320 die Tür elektrisch und gibt diese frei. Sicherheitshinweise GEZE FTV 320 DE Montagehinweise EN Installation instructions FR Consignes de montage Fluchttürverriegelung Emergency exit lock Verrou d‘issue de secours Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: duesseldorf.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info.es@geze.com www.geze.es India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Scandinavia – Latvia GEZE Scandinavia AB Latvijas filiāle E-Mail: latvia@geze.com www.geze.lv Scandinavia – Lithuania GEZE Scandinavia AB Filial Lietu. E-Mail: lithuania@geze.com www.geze.lt Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it South Africa GEZE South Africa (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za Korea GEZE Korea Ltd. E-Mail: info.kr@geze.com www.geze.com Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl Türkiye GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae Scandinavia – Estonia GEZE Scandinavia AB eesti filial E-Mail: estonia@geze.com www.geze.ee Scandinavia – Finland GEZE Scandinavia AB Filial Finland E-Mail: finland@geze.com www.geze.fi United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax: 0049 7152 203 310 www.geze.com The emergency exit lock FTV 320 is part of the GEZE SecuLogic emergency exit system and is used to control and monitor electrically locked doors on emergency exits. The FTV 320 unlocks the door electrically following authorised activation or by pushing the emergency push button on the GEZE door control units TZ 300 / TZ 320 and releases it. Safety instructions Für die Sicherheit von Personen ist es wichtig, nachstehenden Hinweisen Folge zu leisten. Diese Anweisungen sind aufzubewahren! à Die FTV 320 ist nach geltenden Normen und Bestimmungen geprüft und als geeignet anerkannt: EltVTR, EN 13637, EN 1670, EN 61000 à Die Montage an Feuer- und Rauchschutztüren ist nur erlaubt, wenn die Verwendbarkeitsnachweise für diese Türen dieses vorsehen und deren Maßgaben beachtet werden. à Es sind die Sicherheitshinweise des zugelassenen Rettungswegsystems zu beachten. Produkthaftung 159494-01 FR | Français Description du produit à Gemäß der im Produkthaftungsgesetz definierten Haftung des Herstellers für seine Produkte sind die hier enthaltenen Hinweise zu beachten. Die Nichtbeachtung entbindet den Hersteller von seiner Haftungspflicht. à Jede elektrische Verriegelung einer Tür im Verlauf eines Rettungsweges bedarf einer Befreiung von entgegenstehenden Vorschriften im Einzelfall. à Nur Sachkundige, die von GEZE autorisiert sind, dürfen Montagen, Funktionsprüfungen und Wartungen durchführen. à Es dürfen keinerlei mechanische oder elektrische Veränderungen vorgenommen werden. Auch das Entfernen oder Austauschen des Stulps schließt jede Haftung von GEZE für daraus resultierende Schäden aus. Montagehinweise Consignes de sécurité générales To ensure personal safety it is important to follow the notes below. These instructions must be kept. à The FTV 320 has been tested according to applicable standards and stipulations and found to be suitable: EltVTR, EN 13637, EN 1670, EN 61000 à Installation on fire and smoke protection doors is only permitted if the proofs of application suitability for these doors include this and their specifications are heeded. à The safety instructions for the approved emergency exit system must be followed. Product liability Technische Daten Pour la sécurité des personnes, il est essentiel de respecter les consignes suivantes. Ces instructions sont à conserver ! à Le FTV 320 est certifié selon les normes et dispositions applicables et reconnues comme adaptées : EltVTR, EN 13637, EN 1670, EN 61000 à Le montage sur des portes coupe-feu et pare-fumée n’est autorisé que si ces portes disposent d’une preuve de conformité et que les conditions prévues sont respectées. à Les consignes de sécurité du système pour issues de secours homologué doivent être respectées. Responsabilité du fait des produits à In compliance with the manufacturer’s product liability as defined in the German “Product Liability Act”, the instructions included here must be noted and followed. Failure to comply releases the manufacturer from his statutory liability. à Every electrical locking of a door on a rescue route must be exempted from contradictory regulations in individual cases. à Only specialists authorised by GEZE are permitted to carry out installation, function checks and after-sales service maintenance work. à No mechanical or electrical modifications may be made. GEZE shall not be liable for injuries or damage resulting from the removal or replacement of the front metal. Installation details à Die Montage der FTV 320 erfolgt DIN links, DIN rechts, waagerecht oder senkrecht, in Türblatt oder -rahmen. à Die abgeschrägte Seite der Steuerfalle muss beim Einbau in Schließrichtung zeigen. à Es ist darauf zu achten, dass keine Fremdteile oder Feilspäne in das Verriegelungselement gelangen. à Das Anwenden von Schmier- oder Gleitmittel ist untersagt. à Befestigungsschrauben sind nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten und müssen materialspezifisch ausgewählt werden. à Die Fallen der FTV 320 müssen ungehindert in das Schließblech greifen können, sodass die Tür einwandfrei schließt. à Es ist original GEZE-Zubehör zu verwenden. Le verrouillage pour issue de secours FTV 320 fait partie du système pour issues de secours GEZE SecuLogic et sert à commander et à contrôler les portes à verrouillage électrique dans les issues de secours. Une fois le déclenchement autorisé ou une fois le bouton de secours enfoncé sur la centrale de la porte GEZE TZ 300 / TZ 320, le système FTV 320 déverrouille la porte et la débloque. à Conformément à la responsabilité du fabricant vis-à-vis de son produit définie dans la loi relative à la responsabilité du fait des produits, les informations contenues dans le présent document doivent être respectées. Le non-respect libère le fabricant de son devoir de responsabilité. à Chaque verrouillage électrique d’une porte dans une issue de secours nécessite exonération des dispositions contraires au cas pas cas. à Seules les personnes qualifiées dûment autorisées par GEZE doivent réaliser les opérations de montage, de contrôle du fonctionnement et de maintenance. à Aucune modification mécanique ou électrique ne doit être apportée. Le retrait ou le remplacement de la battée libère GEZE de son devoir de responsabilité pour les dommages consécutifs. Consignes de montage à The FTV 320 is installed on the left hand (ISO 6) or right hand (ISO 5) side, horizontally or vertically, in the door leaf or frame. à The tapered side of the control latch must be pointing in the direction of closing movement when installed. à Care must be taken that no foreign material or filings get into the locking element. à The use of lubrication or gliding agents is prohibited. à Fixing screws are not supplied by GEZE and must be selected according to the specific material. à The latches of the FTV 320 must be able to engage freely in the strike plate so that the door can close perfectly. à Genuine GEZE accessories must be used. Technical data à Le montage du système FTV 320 peut être effectué selon DIN à gauche, selon DIN à droite, à l’horizontale ou à la verticale, dans le vantail de la porte ou dans le dormant. à Le côté biseauté du pêne de commande doit indiquer le sens de fermeture lors du montage. à Il est nécessaire de veiller à ce qu’aucune pièce externe et aucun élément de limaille ne se coince dans l’élément de verrouillage. à L’utilisation de graisse lubrifiante ou de lubrifiant est interdite. à Les vis de fixation ne sont pas fournies à la livraison et doivent être choisies de façon spécifique en fonction du matériel. à Les pênes du système FTV 320 doivent pouvoir s’insérer sans obstacle dans la tôle de fermeture afin que la porte puisse se fermer sans difficulté. à Des accessoires d’origine GEZE doivent être utilisés. Caractéristiques techniques Hauptmaße [mm] (B x H x T) Betriebsspannung [V DC] Stromaufnahme [mA] 15,2 x 138,8 x 37,3 24 +/- 15% Main dimensions [mm] (W x H x D) Operating voltage [V DC] Current consumption [mA] … x … x … 24 +/- 15% Dimensions [mm] (L x H x P) Tension de service [V DC] Consommation de courant [mA] 15,2 x 138,8 x 37,3 24 +/- 15% in verriegelten Zustand kurzzeitig bei Verriegelungsvorgang Betriebstemperatur [°C] 110 290 -20/+60 in locked state briefly during the locking process Operating temperature [°C] 110 290 -20/+60 dans un état verrouillé À court terme lors du processus de verrouillage Température de service [°C] 110 290 -20/+60 Eignungsnachweis EltVTR/EN 13637 Suitability certificate EltVTR/EN 13637 Certificat de conformité EltVTR/EN 13637 Aufbruchfestigkeit [N] … Break-open resistance [N] … Résistance à la rupture [N] … Fallenvorlast [N] … Latch sideload [N] … Précontrainte du pêne [N] … Spaltmaß [mm] 5±2 Gap dimensions [mm] 5±2 Écartement de la fente [mm] 5±2 Weitere Informationen und Support im Internet unter www.geze.com Visit www.geze.com for further information and support. Plus d‘informations et de conseils sur Internet sur www.geze.com TZ 300 TZ 320 FTV 320 FTV 320 TZ 300 TZ 320 FTV 320 FTV 320 Li-Y(ST)Y … x 0,25 mm2, max. 100 m B B C 20 18 24 22 J-Y(ST)Y … x … x 0,6 mm, max. 100 m TZ 300 / TZ 320 FTV 320 X101 / X106 (orange) + … 5 - … 6 verriegelt / locked / verrouillé 14 24 V DC … 14 Verriegelungszustand Locking mode … État du verrouillage geschlossen / closed / fermé 15 Verriegelung Locking Verrouillage + 24 V - GND Eingang / Input / Entrée COM1 15 Türzustand Door mode … État de la porte COM2 … COM1 SA Sabotage … 1 NO NO optional / en option … 52 53 … 2 NO 2x 5×35 2x M5×20 … 2

GEZE TZ 300 emergency exit system door control unit

GEZE SECULOGIC TZ300 EN Installation and Commissioning Instructions with Wiring Diagram Emergency Exit System Door Control Unit …  SECULOGIC TZ300 Contents … 1. About this document … … . … . … . … . Product description … Related documents … Key to symbols … Abbreviations … 2. Safety and responsibility … … . … . … . General safety instructions . … Target readership and qualifications … Product liability … 3. Installation and assembly … … . … . … . … . … . Preconditions … Installing the flush-mounted door control unit … Fitting the surface-mounted door control unit … Replacing the lock cylinder … 11 Fitting a safety cylinder, length 40/10 … 11 4. Commissioning … 12 … . … . … . … . Preconditions . … 12 Settings … 12 Description of basic functions … 12 Fire detection system (BMA), hazard alert system (GMA), smoke and heat extraction system (RWA) … 13 5. Operation … 14 … . … . … . … . … . … . Controlling door control unit TZ300 with the key switch … 15 Opening doors in emergencies and triggering alarm … 16 Cancelling alarms … 17 Alarm signal … 18 Removing alarms and system faults … 19 Mains failure … 19 6. Wiring diagram … 20 … . … . … . … . … . … . … . … . … . General information … 20 Markings … 20 Current consumption … 20 Door control units … 21 Locking elements … 26 Key switch … 29 Access control … 32 Timer … 33 IQ Lock EM, lever locks … 34 7. … . … . … . Appendix … 36 Commissioning check list … 36 Glossary of terms … 37 Data sheets … 38 SECULOGIC TZ300 … About this document About this document These instructions describe the installation and commissioning of the GEZE TZ300 door control unit. … Product description The GEZE door control unit is part of the SecuLogic emergency exit system. It is designed for controlling and monitoring electrically interlocked emergency exit doors. It secures doors along emergency exit routes against unauthorized access. At the same time the built-in emergency stop pushbutton allows instant passage in the event of an emergency. Through a built-in interface a smoke and heat extraction, burglar alarm or hazard alert system can be connected, which unlocks the door in an emergency to allow an escape from the building. External signal transmitters, such as alarm bells or warning lights can be connected as well as an alarm signalling interface to the building services management system. Built-in buzzers and LEDs provide visual and audible indication when an alarm has been triggered. … Related documents All components are supplied with data sheets containing their technical specifications. These data sheets, as well as further documentation, is available on the Internet under www.geze.de/SecuLogic. … Key to symbols Warning In these instructions, warnings are used to warn against material damage and injuries. XX Always read and observe these warnings. XX Follow all instructions marked with the warning symbol and the word WARNING. Warning symbol Warning Meaning WARNING Danger for people. Serious or fatal injury can occur if these instructions are not observed. Further symbols used in these instructions Important information and technical notes are emphasised to illustrate the correct operation. Symbol Meaning means “Important note” means “Additional information” XX Symbol for a user action. Observe the sequence if there are several action steps. … About this document … Abbreviations Abbreviation AKRR BLE220 BMA FS FTÖ GCDU100 GCDU200 GCFP401 GCRR200 GCVR200 GLT GMA IQ Lock C IQ Lock EL IQ Lock EM IQ Lock M KZF MA500 NC NO NOT320 PSU OKFF RR RWA SCT221 SCT222 SCT320 SHB220 SLE220 SLH220 TZ300S TZ300S ZSU … SECULOGIC TZ300 Meaning Feedback contact interlocked (actuated by the anchor) Flashlight Fire detection system Latch lock Emergency exit door opener Single-door unit Door unit Fingerprint RFiD card reader RFiD card reader Building services management Hazard alert system Self-locking contact lock Self-locking motor lock Self-locking lever lock Self-locking mechanical panic lock Short-term release Holding magnet Floating NC (normally closed) contact Floating NO (normally open) contact Emergency button Power supply unit Upper edge of finished floor “Door closed” feedback contact (actuated through sliders on the latch) Smoke and heat extraction system Key-operated pushbutton, single-pole pushbutton (NO), extendable to single-pole reversing (two NO) Key switch with LED indicator, single-pole reversing (two NO) Key switch, single-pole reversing (two NO) Alarm bell with flashlight Signal lamp Alarm bell Door control unit with key switch (connection through ribbon cable) Door control unit with key switch and built-in PSU Timer SECULOGIC TZ300 … Safety and responsibility Safety and responsibility The GEZE door control unit has been designed according to the latest technical standards and acknowledged safety rules and regulations. Dangers can, nevertheless, occur in its installation and use. You must therefore observe the following instructions. … General safety instructions XX Installation, commissioning and repairs must be performed only by GEZE-authorized specialists. XX Use only genuine GEZE parts for repairs. XX GEZE accepts no liability for damage arising from unauthorized modifications to the installation. XX Primary building safety measures must be taken by the owner. XX Cables must be laid according to standards VDE 0100 and VDE 0815. XX To prevent unauthorized access, never leave the key in the key switch. XX Doors with electrical locks along escape routes should be inspected annually by a specialist. The specialist must issue a certificate verifying the periodic inspection, which the owner must submit to the building inspectorate on request. The inspection can be performed by a GEZE service technician or a GEZE-authorized service provider as part of a maintenance contract. XX In addition, GEZE recommends a monthly inspection of the emergency exit system for visible damage and faults by the owner. Any identified damage or faults must be rectified immediately by a GEZE service technician or a GEZE-authorized service provider. Intended use The GEZE door control unit is intended for controlling and monitoring electrically locked emergency exits. Thirdparty products must be used only after consultation with GEZE. Improper use Improper use includes the connection of any products that are not expressly approved by GEZE. … Target readership and qualifications Installation, assembly, commissioning and repairs must be performed only by GEZE-authorized specialists. … Product liability àà According to manufacturers’ liability for their products as defined in the German product liability act, the information contained herein and in the associated installation instructions and wiring diagrams (product information and intended use, incorrect use, product performance, product maintenance, obligation to inform and obligation to provide instruction) must be observed. Non-observation frees the manufacturer from their liability. àà Installation, function testing and maintenance must be performed only by GEZE-authorized personnel. GEZE accepts no liability for damage arising from unauthorized modifications to the installation. àà A combination with third-party devices invalidates GEZE’s warranty. For repair and maintenance, use only original GEZE parts. … Installation and assembly … SECULOGIC TZ300 Installation and assembly Warning! Risk of death through electric shock. XX Installation and assembly must be performed only by GEZE-approved specialist personnel. XX Check that all cables are voltage-free before installation. … Preconditions àà Cables are routed according to GEZE cabling diagram àà Miniature circuit-breakers as primary, mains-side disconnectors àà Observation of standards VDE 0100 und VDE 0815 for laying cables àà Tamper-proof cable routing according to VDE 0833 (surface-mounted cables in steel conduit) àà For flush-mounted cabling, flush-mounted sockets (depth … mm) at a mounting height of 850 mm from floor surface and up to 1200 mm for the emergency button … Installing the flush-mounted door control unit These instructions describe the recommended installation of the a flush-mounted door control unit using the TZ300SN as an example. … 2 … 7 … 6 … 1 … 3 … 5 … 7 … Emergency exit label Frame PSU NET220 Terminal blocks Ribbon cable Control unit with emergency pushbutton TST300 Key switch SCT320 SECULOGIC TZ300 Installation and assembly XX Lay mains cable and ribbon cable in the flush-mounted sockets. XX Connect cable to terminal blocks according to wiring diagram. ,5 62 60 850 - 1200 71 71 XX Connect and fit the PSU. XX Connect the key switch door control module with the ribbon cable. … Installation and assembly SECULOGIC TZ300 XX Fit the terminal blocks to the back of the door control unit. C D C D XX Fit the door control unit. XX Fit the green adhesive frame. XX Test the unit’s function. … SECULOGIC TZ300 … Installation and assembly Fitting the surface-mounted door control unit … 1 Door control unit TZ300SN … Terminal blocks … XX Open the housing. … Installation and assembly SECULOGIC TZ300 XX Fit the wall-mounting bracket near the door (height of emergency button: 850 mm – 1200 mm from floor 850 - 1200 surface). XX Take off the mains connection cover. XX Connect the 230 V cable to the screw terminals of the PSU and refit the cover. XX Connect cable to terminal blocks according to wiring diagram. XX Fit the terminal blocks to the back of the door control unit. XX Secure loose cables with cable ties. XX Hook in housing and secure with screws. XX Fit the cover of the emergency button. XX Test the unit’s function. XX Apply the labels “EMERGENCY” and “Press only in emergency” in the required language on the provided fields on the emergency exit sign. The required adhesive labels are supplied separately in English, French, German and Norwegian. 10 SECULOGIC TZ300 … Replacing the lock cylinder The lock cylinder must fulfil the following requirements: àà Profile half-cylinder, 40 mm (30/10) àà Eight-way adjustable XX When the plant is in operation, disable tamper switch. àà To do this, turn key to left for ten seconds. Right LED lights up green. The left LED goes out. Tamper alarm function is disabled for two minutes. XX Take housing off the wall bracket. XX Unscrew key switch. XX Release cap screw and remove the lock cylinder. … Fitting a safety cylinder, length 40/10 If using a safety cylinder with 50 mm (40/10), use the spacers between key switch and housing. Fit the spacers before the carrier plate; this moves the complete fixture to the back by 10 mm. The spacer set is not included as standard with the door control unit. The set also contains four longer screws, which must be used instead of the existing screws. XX Replace the lock cylinder. XX Fit a new lock cylinder and secure with cap screw. XX Reassemble the door control unit in reverse order to disassembly. XX Test the unit’s function. 11 Commissioning … Commissioning … Preconditions SECULOGIC TZ300 Doors with electrical locks along escape routes must be taken into operation after the manufacturer has certified their suitability for the intended purpose. In addition, the correct installation and correct function of the electrical lock must be verified by a specialist. … .1 Tamper switch TST300 When operating voltage is applied to the TZ300, a tamper alarm is triggered if the emergency button’s hood is not fitted. … .2 Tamper switch SCT320 (on UP only) When operating voltage is applied to the TZ300, a tamper alarm is triggered if the emergency button’s hood is not fitted. If the tamper switch of the key switch is not to be evaluated, you must fit a jumper between terminals … and 54. … .3 Disabling the tamper alarm For maintenance, the tamper alarm can be disabled for a limited time. To do this, turn the built-in key switch to the left for about ten seconds. This disables the tamper alarm for about two minutes. While it is disabled, the right LED is lit green and the left LED is off. To reenable the tamper alarm before the two minutes are up, turn the built-in key switch to the right. The door control unit is then unlocked. To lock it, turn the key switch to the right again. … Settings No settings can be made or changed on the door control unit. All values, such as short-term release, cancelling, pre-alarm, etc. are permanently set. … Description of basic functions … .1 Short-term release (KZF) Short-term release releases the emergency door protection for a limited time. During this time, access through the door is possible without triggering an alarm. It is activated with the built-in key switch or an external actuator connected to the short-term release input. The short-term release duration is about 20 seconds. … .2 Cancellation of short-term release When short-term release is active, the door locks prematurely when it is closed before the short-term release time has expired. This prevents unauthorized access through the door after an authorized person has gone through. … .3 Retriggering on short-term release If the short-term release function is triggered again while the function is still active, the short-term release period starts again. … .4 Pre-alarm If the door is passed through after the short-term release time has expired, an audible signal is issued to warn the user that the short-term release time has expired. The pre-alarm duration is 60 seconds. If the door is closed while a pre-alarm is active, the door is locked again automatically and the pre-alarm is reset. 12 SECULOGIC TZ300 … .5 Commissioning Door alarm If the pre-alarm time is exceeded, the door alarm is triggered. This must then be reset with the built-in key switch or with a new short-term release command. If the door is closed while the door alarm is active, it locks and can be unlocked again only after the alarm has been reset (except when the emergency button is pressed or emergency unlocking is triggered). The door alarm is also triggered when the door is opened forcefully. … .6 Unlocked The power supply to the locking element is permanently interrupted. The door can be passed through without triggering an alarm. … .7 Locked The locking element is energized through the door control unit. The emergency door protection is active and unauthorized people can open the door only by pressing the emergency button, which triggers an alarm. … .8 Emergency unlocking The TZ300 can be unlocked in an emergency by the fire detection, burglar alarm or hazard alert system. This is a non-safety-relevant interruption of the power supply to the locking element. When the BMA, GMA or RWA signal is cancelled, the alarm is automatically reset after 60 seconds. … .9 Direct unlocking (according to EltVTR) Safety-relevant interruption of the power supply to the electrical lock through an NC contact when the emergency button is pressed. … Fire detection system (BMA), hazard alert system (GMA), smoke and heat extraction system (RWA) … .1 Alarm triggers If the BMA, GMA or RWA signal of a door control unit is applied, it is unlocked and a local alarm is triggered (audible through built-in buzzer and visual through built-in LED). The system remains unlocked as long as the signal is applied and until the alarm has been reset. See … .3, “Resetting the alarm”. The alarm is triggered through a floating NC contact. If no BMA, GMA or RWA exists, a 2K resistor must be fitted across the Fire Detection System input (terminals … and 10, orange terminal field. This is the as-supplied state. If a BMA or GMA system is connected, the 2K resistor at the emergency unlocking input of the TZ300 (terminals … and 10) must be removed and connected in series with the NC contact of the BMA or GMA. … .2 Cable monitoring according to prEN 13637 For installations according to prEN 13637 the cable between fire detection system and door control unit must be monitored. A 2k resistor must be fitted in series with the NC contact at the fire detection system output for this purpose. … .3 Resetting/acknowledging the alarm When the BMA signal is cancelled, the alarm is automatically reset after 60 seconds. The visual and audible signal at the TZ300 goes out and the door control unit locks the door. The system can be reset before the 60 seconds have expired with the built-in key switch of the TZ300. To unlock the system after a reset, turn the key to the left for more than one second. To lock the system after a reset, turn the key to the right. 13 Operation … SECULOGIC TZ300 Operation … 2 … Emergency exit label … Key switch … Control unit with emergency button … “Locked” LED … “Door state” LED … “Alarm” LED … No. … 2 … 14 Indicator Colour Meaning Red Locked Green Unlocked Green flashing (every second) Short-term release Red Door closed Green Door open Yellow Alarm Yellow flashing (every second) Pre-alarm Yellow flashing Fault SECULOGIC TZ300 … Operation Controlling door control unit TZ300 with the key switch Unlocking the door When the system is unlocked, the locking elements are disabled and the door can be opened. XX Turn the key to the left and hold it for about one second. … 1 … LED … lights up green. The door is unlocked. Locking the door When the system is unlocked, the locking elements are enabled and the door can not be be opened. Preconditions: The door is closed; otherwise a pre-alarm is triggered. XX Turn the key to the right. … 2 … LEDs … and … light up red. The door is locked. 15 Operation SECULOGIC TZ300 Unlocking the door temporarily (short-term release = 20 seconds) With the short-term release function, the door can be unlocked with the key switch for 20 seconds. When this time has expired, the door is locked again. àà If the door is not closed after short-term release time has expired, a pre-alarm is issued. àà If the door is closed after the short-term release time has expired, the door is locked again. àà If the short-term release function is triggered again while the function is still active, the short-term release period starts again (is retriggered). Precondition: The door is locked. XX Turn the key to the right. … 2 … LED … flashes green. The door remains unlocked for the set period of 20 seconds. On cancellation the LED lights up red. … Opening doors in emergencies and triggering alarm When the emergency button is pressed the door’s locking elements are de-energized and the door can be opened (direct unlocking). If a connected fire detection or similar system triggers, the locking elements are de-energized automatically to release the door (emergency unlocking). XX Press the emergency button. … 2 … LED … lights up green and LED … lights up yellow. The door is unlocked. The alarm is triggered. 16 SECULOGIC TZ300 … Operation Cancelling alarms Alarms of the door control unit remain active until their cause has been eliminated and the alarm is acknowledged at the door control unit. (Exception: emergency unlocking through BMA,GMA or RWA, after which the alarm is automatically reset after 60 seconds; see section … .3.) … .1 Resetting emergency button When the emergency has passed, the emergency button must be reset. XX Remove emergency button cover. XX Turn emergency button to the right. The emergency button returns to its normal state. XX Refit the cover. XX Acknowledge the alarm. … .2 Acknowledge alarm Precondition: The alarm cause has been eliminated. To acknowledge the alarm and lock the door XX Turn the key to the right To acknowledge the alarm and unlock the door XX Turn the key to the left The door alarm can also be acknowledged through the short-term release input. A tamper alarm can be acknowledged only 30 seconds after the alarm cause has been eliminated. For the duration of the tamper alarm the TZ300 remains locked. It can, however, be unlocked with the emergency button. If the alarm can not be acknowledged with the key switch, a new alarm may be active. If, for example, the cover was not refitted after resetting the emergency button, a tamper alarm is triggered when emergency unlocking is acknowledged, and the door control unit locks the door. This is indicated by a change in the sound of the audible signal. 17 Operation … SECULOGIC TZ300 Alarm signal Misuse of the system and emergency situations are indicated by a built-in buzzer and yellow alarm LED 3. An alarm can, in principle, be acknowledged only when its cause has been removed. Alarm Pre-alarm Alarm LED Alarm bell Yellow flashing light Acoustic signal, … beeps (1 s on, … s off) Door alarm Yellow continuous light Acoustic signal, … seconds continuous Tamper alarm Yellow continuous light Acoustic signal, … beeps Alarm Yellow continuous light Acoustic signal, … seconds continuous - Unlocking through emergency button - Triggering trough BMA/GMA System fault 18 Yellow flashing light No acoustic signal at … second interval SECULOGIC TZ300 … Operation Removing alarms and system faults Alarm state Cause of alarm Pre-alarm Door not closed after unlocking period has expired. XX Close door. XX Unlock door. No closed signal XX Close door. No closed signal XX Check door contact. XX Check locking element. No locked signal XX Close contact. Tamper switch of door control unit not XX Fit cover. closed (on UP only). XX After suppression time,acknowledge alarm. Key switch tamper switch not closed. Door alarm Tamper alarm Alarm Elimination of alarm cause Emergency button of TZ300 pressed (direct unlocking). Fuse in TST300 blown. XX Reset door control unit emergency Emergency unlocking through connected BMA, GMA or RWA. XX Check BMA, GMA or RWA and switch button. XX Check fuse. XX Replace fuse. off emergency unlocking signal. XX Check input of affected door control unit. 2K resistor between terminals … and 10 not set and XX Fit a 2K resistor between terminals … no BMA, GMA or RWA connected. and 10. Locking element connected with reversed polarity. XX Immediately isolate from the power Emergency button LED goes on and off. Other LEDs supply and connect correctly. remain off. (With PSUs NET220 und NT19.2-24. With larger PSUs the fuse blows.) XX Connect locking element. Locking element not connected. XX Remove jumper on FTÖ331. Jumper on FTÖ331U was not removed. XX Check locking element supply line for FTÖ332 is connected without RP220. Short-circuit in the supply line of the lockingeleshort-circuit. XX Connect FTÖ332 with RP220. ment. XX Press emergency button. XX Release (pull out) emergency button. XX Replace door control unit. Controller defective When the alarm cause has been remedied, the alarm must be acknowledged with the built-in key switch. … Mains failure When mains power is restored, the door control unit is always in operating state Locked. If an alarm is active when mains power is restored, the door control unit is in operating state Alarm. Operating mode before mains failure Operating mode after mains failure Locked Permanent unlocking Short-term release Alarm Locked Locked Locked Alarm or acknowledge alarm if cause no longer exists 19 Wiring diagram SECULOGIC TZ300 … Wiring diagram … General information Unless otherwise stated, the wiring diagrams apply to surface-mounting versions and flush-mounting versions from TS300, software version … . … Markings The wiring in these wiring diagrams are marked as follows: … Colour Former designation to DIN 47002 New designation to DIN IEC 757 Colour Former designation to DIN 47002 New designation to DIN IEC 757 Black Brown Red Orange Yellow Green sw br rt or ge gn BK BN RD OG YE GN Blue Violet Grey White Pink Turquoise bl vi gr ws rs tk BU VT GY WH PK TQ Current consumption When connecting external devices, observe the overall power consumption. àà Output rating for external devices through standard PSU: àà Flush-mounted version (NET220): 24 V DC, max. 350 mA àà Surface-mounted version (NT19.2-24): 24 V DC, max. 650 mA àà Output rating for external devices through external PSU (Net24-5, Logo): … A … .1 Consumer Consumption in mA (approx.) Consumer Consumption in mA (approx.) Door control unit TZ300 Control module TST300 120 100 Holding magnet MA500 Emergency exit door opener FTÖ331 Emergency exit door opener FTÖ332 Relay card RP220 250 160 105 10 Numerical code lock CTI / CTS V Signal lamp SLE220 Flashlight BLE220 Alarm bell with flashlight Alarm bell SLE220 Key switch with LED SCT222 50 85 90 110 16 30 Single-door unit GCDU100 Door unit GCDU200 Master unit GCMU200 GCMDU200 Master unit GCMU524 30 120 120 120 130 Fingerprint reader GCFP401 Card reader GCRR200 Card reader GCVR200 Smoke switch RS5 200 100 100 19 IQ Lock EM / EM DL, 24 V version IQ Lock EL / EL DL with controller MST210 210 250 Examples for calculating the total power consumption Example 1: Single-leaf emergency door with 1×TZ300SN UP (120 mA), 1× FTÖ331 (160 mA) and 1× SLE220 (85 mA). Total current consumption of all devices = 365 mA; external devices = 245 mA (without TZ300) Conclusion: PSU NET220 with 500 mA of the TZ300SN UP is sufficient. Example 2: Two-leaf emergency door with TZ300SN AP (120 mA), 2× MA500 (250 mA), SCT222 (30 mA) and RP220 (10 mA) IQ Lock EM DL 24V (210 mA) Total current consumption of all devices = 870 mA; external devices = 750 mA (without TZ300) Conclusion: PSU NT19.2-24 with 800 mA of the TZ320SN AP is not sufficient. Solution 1: For IQ Lock EM DL, use separate PSU (NT6.3-24, 260 mA, No. 109637) Solution 2: Use TZ300S without PSU and draw power from external PSU. (e.g. NT24-5, 24 V, … A No. 111182 or Siemens Logo 24 V, … A, No. 078401) 20 SECULOGIC TZ300 … Wiring diagram Door control units Programming interface orange Door LED blue Latch LED Emergency button LED red Tamper switch Buzzer Alarm LEDs … .1 Door control unit TZ300 (terminals, fuses) Fuse Name Value Meaning F1 … A, SMF 125 V, quick-acting 24 V external Operator control and display elements àà Latch LED àà Door LED àà Alarm LED àà Buzzer (75 dB at about 50 cm distance) Technical specifications Current consumption: 100mA Supply voltage for external devices: àà with standard PSU of the TZ300: àà with external PSU: UP: NET220, max. 350 mA; AP: NT19.2-24, max. 650 mA max. 800 mA (use only GEZE-approved PSUs) Terminal assignment Max. cable cross-section for screw and plug-in terminals: … mm² X103 X100 X101 X102 Terminal Function blade terminal for GEZE key switch Supply GND red terminal field … 24 V DC supply … Locking element, +, 24 V DC orange terminal field … Locking element, -, GND … Door locked feedback 14 Door closed feedback 15 24 V DC … 24 V DC … Brief unlocking input … Emergency unlocking input 10 24 V DC … 24 V DC Blue terminal field … NO, alarm output 22 Com, alarm output 21 NC, alarm output 20 GND … Max. … A, 24 V DC 21 Wiring diagram … .2 SECULOGIC TZ300 Notes about the wiring diagram The notes apply for the following wiring diagram of the various versions of the TZ300. 1) Building mains fuse. 2) The primary and secondary sides must be spatially separated. For the TZ300S the PSU must be fitted externally. 3) TZ300SN UP: Protection class II, PE (protective earth) conductor is not connected. TZ300SN AP: Protection class I with PE conductor testing according to VDE0100. 4) In delivery state the 2K resistor is fitted. When connecting a BMA, GMA or RWA, remove the resistor and connect it in series with the NC contact of the BMA, GMA or RWA (see plan “Emergency unlocking through BMA, GMA or RWA”). 5) Contact closed when door closed. 6) When a GEZE alarm bell or siren is fitted, a jumper must be set. 22 SECULOGIC TZ300 … .3 Wiring diagram Door control unit TZ300S, TZ300SN blue For notes about the wiring diagram, see section … .2 23 Wiring diagram … .4 SECULOGIC TZ300 TZ300SN, TZ300S: Door monitor without locking element For use, for example, as door monitor Function: The door can be opened at any time through the panic handle. Opening the door without authorization triggers the door alarm, which, in turn, triggers a visual and acoustic alarm through the built-in signal generators. The door alarm remains active until the door is closed again and the alarm is reset with the built-in key switch or through the Short-term release input. Authorized access is possible with short-term release function or by permanently unlocking the door. X102 (blue) X100 (red) 24 V DC Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge Unlock SCT, acknowledge Tamper GEZE SCT320 Key switch X102 or X103 Ribbon cable Connection to TST300 X103 TST300 Plug for GEZE key switch X100 (red terminal strip) Power supply unit Screw terminal Supply GND 24 V DC supply Relay card RP220 Nr. 102355 X101 (orange terminal strip) Locking + Locking Door locked Door contact 24 V DC Door closed 24 V DC Brief unlocking input Emergency unlocking input 24 V DC Temporary unlocking through: - External key switch - Access control - Cylinder contact - Button, etc. Floating NO contact required Caution: Order of terminals not as on terminal strip X102 (blue terminal strip) Alarm output max. … A, 24 V DC Signal lamp Alarm bell Optionally for additional acoustic and/or visual alarm signalling. Observe max. total power consumption of TZ300SN. 24 SECULOGIC TZ300 … .5 Wiring diagram Emergency unlocking through BMA, GMA or RWA For notes about the wiring diagram, see section … .2 25 Wiring diagram … SECULOGIC TZ300 Locking elements If the door has several unlocking elements, connect the coils in parallel and the feedback signal cables in series. (blue) Programming interface red … .1 Holding magnet MA500 (single-leaf doors) TST300 - X101 (orange terminal strip) Locking + Locking Door locked 24 V DC Door closed 5) Door contact 24 V DC … .2 Holding magnet MA500 (two-leaf doors) TST300 – X101 (orange terminal strip) Locking + Locking Door locked 24 V DC Door closed Door contact 26 Door contact SECULOGIC TZ300 … .3 Wiring diagram Emergency door opener TYP331U DIN right/left (single-leaf doors) X101 (orange terminal strip) FTÖ331U Locking + … 1 + Locking - … 2 - Door locked 14 … NO 24 V DC … 7 COM Door closed 15 … NC 24 V DC … 5 NO … COM … NC AKRR RR XX Caution: Sever red wire jumper (1–7) behind the terminal field of the FTÖ331U. … .4 Emergency door opener TYP331U DIN right/left (two-leaf doors) X101 (orange terminal strip) A B FTÖ331U FTÖ331U … 1 + A … + Locking - … 2 - B … - Door locked 14 … NO … NO 24 V DC … 7 COM … COM Door closed 15 … NC … NC … NO … NO … COM … COM … NC … NC Locking + AKRR RR AKRR RR XX Caution: Sever red wire jumper (1–7) behind the terminal field of the FTÖ331U. … .5 Emergency door opener TYP331 DIN right/left (single-leaf doors) FTÖ331 DIN right X101 (orange terminal strip) FTÖ331 DIN left Locking + … 5 + … Locking - … 6 - Door locked 14 … NO 24 V DC … 2 COM Door closed 15 … NC 24 V DC … RD NO GN COM BU NC … + … 1 - 14 … NO … 5 COM … NC RD NO GN COM BU NC 15 AKRR RR For notes about the wiring diagram, see section … .2 27 Wiring diagram … .6 SECULOGIC TZ300 Emergency door opener TYP331 DIN right (two-leaf doors) X101 (orange terminal strip) A B Locking + … 5 + A … + Locking - … 6 - B … - Door locked 14 … NO … NO 24 V DC … 2 COM … COM Door closed 15 … .7 AKRR … NC … NC RD NO RD NO GN COM GN COM BU NC BU NC … + RR A B Locking + … 2 + A Locking - … 1 - B Door locked 14 … NO 24 V DC … 5 COM Door closed 15 … NC RD NO GN COM BU NC AKRR RR Emergency door opener TYP332 (1-leaf doors) X101 (orange terminal strip) Locking + Locking Door closed 24 V DC 24 V DC Door locked Relay card RP220 No. 102355 28 RR Emergency door opener TYP331 DIN left (two-leaf doors) X101 (orange terminal strip) … .8 AKRR … - … NO … COM … NC RD NO GN COM BU NC AKRR RR SECULOGIC TZ300 Wiring diagram … Key switch … .1 Key switch SCT320 to short-term release AS … .2 Key switch SCT220 to short-term release orange terminal strip 24 V DC COM Brief unlocking input Closed on right Closed on left No. 115937, UP Jung AS500, WW No. 094170, UP Jung LS990, stainless steel No. 094012, UP GIRA E2, pure white … .3 Key switch SCT221/SCT to short-term release (orange terminal strip) 24 V DC Brief unlocking input SCT No. 117996 + 024467 UP AS500 SCT No. 117996 + 024467 + 120503 AP AS500 SCT221 No. 054240 + 024467 without PHZ UP SCT221 No. 054532 + 024467 without PHZ AP SCT221 No. 054245 + 024467 with PHZ UP SCT221 No. 054533 + 024467 with PHZ AP No. 094170, UP Jung LS990, stainless steel No. 094012, UP GIRA E2, pure white 29 Wiring diagram … .4 SECULOGIC TZ300 Key switch SCT320 for external control – unlocking, locking, short-term release unlocking and acknowledging alarms Connected through SCT320 of door control unit TZ300 key switch key switch 24 V DC 24 V DC Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge Unlock SCT, acknowledge Unlock SCT, acknowledge Tamper Tamper No. 130370, UP GIRA E2, pure white No. 132278, UP GIRA E2, anthracite No. 131984, UP Jung AS500, WW … .5 Key switch SCT220 for external control – unlocking, locking, short-term release and acknowledging alarms Connected through SCT320 of door control unit TZ300 key switch 24 V DC COM Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge Closed on right Unlock SCT, acknowledge Closed on left Tamper 30 No. 115937, UP Jung AS500, WW No. 094170, UP Jung LS990, stainless steel No. 094012, UP GIRA E2, pure white SECULOGIC TZ300 … .6 Wiring diagram Key switch with indicator SCT222 For connecting the SCT222, relay card RP220 is required in addition. red terminal strip Power supply unit Screw terminal Supply GND 24 V DC supply orange terminal strip Locking + Locking Door locked 24 V DC Door closed 24 V DC Door contact Brief unlocking input Emergency unlocking input 24 V DC Caution: Sever red wire jumper (1–7) behind terminal field of FTÖ331U Caution: Order of terminals not as on terminal strip Relay card RP220 Nr. 102355 blue terminal strip 24 V DC Alarm output max. … A, 24 V DC green-red LED Ribbon cable yellow LED Plug for GEZE key switch right contact Key switch Connection to TST300 24 V DC Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge Unlock SCT, acknowledge left contact SCT222 UP No. 100064 SCT222 AP No. 100065 Tamper For notes about the wiring diagram, see section … .2 31 Wiring diagram SECULOGIC TZ300 … Access control … .1 Numerical code lock Toplock CTI, CTI B X102 (blue) or X100 (red) X101 (orange terminal strip) Brief unlocking input … .2 Numerical codelock Toplock CTS V, CTS BV Number codelock Toplock CTS V, CTS BV (orange terminal strip) 24 V DC Brief unlocking input 32 Evaluation unit SECULOGIC TZ300 … .3 Wiring diagram Access control Single-door control unit GCDU100 Door control unit GCDU200 (orange terminal strip) 24 V DC Brief unlocking input Optionally the GCDU100 can be supplied with power through the TZ300. Observe total power consumption! X100 (red terminal strip) Supply GND 24 V DC supply … Timer (orange terminal strip) 24 V DC Brief unlocking input Floating NO contact The door control unit is temporarily unlocked for the duration of the contact. 33 Wiring diagram SECULOGIC TZ300 … IQ Lock EM, lever locks … .1 IQ Lock EM power from TZ300 For connecting the IQ Lock EM, relay card RP220 is required in addition. X100 (red terminal strip) Power supply unit Screw terminal Supply GND 24 V DC supply X101 (orange terminal strip) Locking + Locking Door locked 24 V DC Door closed 24 V DC Door contact Brief unlocking input Emergency unlocking input 24 V DC Caution: Sever red wire jumper (1–7) behind terminal field of FTÖ331U Caution: Order of terminals not as on terminal strip Relay card RP220 Nr. 102355 Lock connection cable X102 (blue terminal strip) red wire Magnet + black wire Magnet - red/blue wire COM cylinder contact grey/pink wire NO cylinder contact Temporary unlocking through: - External key switch - Access control - Button, etc. Floating NO contact required Function: When the TZ300 is locked, the outer lever handle of the IQ Lock EM is disengaged. When the TZ300 is temporarily or permanently unlocked, the outer lever handle is engaged. Option 1: When the cylinder contact of IQ Lock is connected to the Temporary Unlocking input, cylinder operation through the key triggers temporary unlocking. At the same time, the TZ300 engages the outer lever handle. *) Observe total power consumption of the TZ300. If necessary, use a separate power supply unit. 34 SECULOGIC TZ300 … .2 Wiring diagram IQ Lock EM power from separate PSU For connecting the IQ Lock EM, relay card RP220 is required in addition. Power supply unit No. 109637 Function: When the TZ300 is locked, the outer lever handle of the IQ Lock EM is disengaged. When the TZ300 is temporarily or permanently unlocked, the outer lever handle is engaged. Option 1: When the cylinder contact of IQ Lock is connected to the Temporary Unlocking input, cylinder operation through the key triggers temporary unlocking. At the same time, the TZ300 engages the outer lever handle. For notes about the wiring diagram, see section … .2 35 Appendix … Appendix … Commissioning check list SECULOGIC TZ300 Yes Power supply OK Upper edge of all emergency buttons between 850 and 1200 mm from floor surface All emergency button labels applied Cables laid according to DIN VDE 0833, tamper-protected All screws of magnet mounting tightened Rubber buffers on screws of magnetic disc OK Magnet surfaces cleaned Door passage lights at least 2000 mm Emergency door opener fitted correctly and tamper-protected All cables connected, exposed cables insulated Emergency button illumination working “Emergency button” function OK Tamper switches working correctly Unlocking through key switch is working correctly Locking through key switch is working correctly Feedback from magnet and/or door opener working correctly Additional door contacts working correctly Door Leaf Open/Closed LED working correctly Door Locked/Unlocked LED working correctly Alarm/Fault LED working correctly 2K resistor correctly set if BMA, GMA or RWA connected Magnets working; door openers are locking All access possibilities OK (access control, etc.) Emergency exit doors OK External key switch OK External alarm generator/alarm generator combination working correctly Uninterruptible power supply working correctly 36 No Not fitted SECULOGIC TZ300 … Appendix Glossary of terms Direct unlocking (according to EltVTR) Safety-relevant interruption of the power supply to the electrical lock through an NC contact when the emergency button is pressed. Unlocking (according to EltVTR) Non-safety-relevant interruption of the power supply to the electrical lock, for example with a key switch. Unlocking (according to EltVTR) Non-safety-relevant interruption of the power supply to the electrical lock, for example by a hazard alert system (GMA) or similar automatic triggering system. Pre-alarm If the door is passed through after the short-term release time has expired, an audible signal is issued to warn the user that the short-term release time has expired. The pre-alarm duration is 60 seconds. If the door is closed while a pre-alarm is active, the door is locked automatically and the pre-alarm is reset. Door alarm If the pre-alarm time is exceeded, the door alarm is triggered. This must then be reset with the built-in key switch or with a new short-term release command. If the door is closed while the door alarm is active, it locks and can be unlocked again only after the alarm has been reset (except when the emergency button is pressed). The door alarm is also triggered when the door is opened forcefully. Cancelling short-term release If the door is closed before the short-term release time has expired, short-term release is terminated and the door locked again. This prevents unauthorized access through the door after an authorized person has passed through it. Retriggering short-term release If the short-term release function is triggered again while the function is still active, the short-term release period starts again. 37 Appendix … Data sheets … .1 Door control unit TZ300 UP Technical specifications Device name Function Dimensions Installation Operating voltage Power consumption Total power consumption Protection class Mounting location Ambient temperature Directives Package content Display elements Fuse 38 SECULOGIC TZ300 Door control unit TZ300 UP Monitoring and controlling an emergency exit door 55 × 55 × 37 (w × h × d) w × h: Button face d: Distance from support ring upper edge to terminal rear edge UP socket, diameter 60 mm, depth … mm 24 V DC (±10 %) 100 mA at 24 V DC (w/o peripherals) … A at 24 V DC (depending on PSU used) II according to EN 60950 (in built-in state) Dry rooms -10 to 50 °C German “Guideline on Electrical Locking Systems of Doors in Escape Routes (EltVTR) – Version December 1997”. Control unit, terminals and replacement fuse Catch LED, door LED, alarm LED, buzzer Buzzer, 75 dB (at about 50 cm distance) F1, … A, SMF 125 V, fast-acting, 24 V, external SECULOGIC TZ300 … .2 Appendix Door control unit TZ300 AP Technical specifications Device name Versions Function Dimensions Installation Operating voltage Power consumption Total power consumption Protection class Mounting location Ambient temperature Directives Package content Display elements Fuse Door control unit TZ300 AP TZ 300SN with built-in key switch and PSU TZ 300S with built-in key switch Monitoring and controlling an emergency exit door 72 × 197 × 88 (w × h × d) Wall mounting Versions with PSU: 230 V, 50 Hz Versions without PSU: 24 V DC (±10 %) 100 mA at 24 V DC (w/o peripherals) Versions with PSU: 800 mA Versions without PSU: Max. 1A (depending on PSU used) Versions with PSU: I according to EN 60950 Versions without PSU: II according to EN 60950 Dry rooms -10 to 50 °C German “Guideline on Electrical Locking Systems of Doors in Escape Routes (EltVTR) – Version December 1997”. Mounting plate, preaasembled housing, mounting accessories, terminals and replacement fuse Catch LED, door LED, alarm LED, buzzer Buzzer, 75 dB (at about 50 cm distance) F1, … A, SMF 125 V, fast-acting, 24 V, external 39  … .3 SECULOGIC TZ300 Emergency exit sign FWS320UP Technical specifications Device name Function Dimensions Installation Mounting location Ambient temperature Package content … .4 In UP socket, 60 mm, depth … mm Dry rooms -10 to 50 °C Emergency exit sign module, green border Key switch SCT320UP Technical specifications Device name Versions Function Dimensions Installation Operating voltage Protection class Mounting location Ambient temperature Package content 40 Emergency exit sign FWS320UP (non-illuminated) Emergency exit label 55 × 55 × 16 (w × h × d) w × h: Emergency exit label d: Distance from support ring upper edge to fitted ribbon cable Key switch SCT320UP White Anthracite Pure white Key switch with tamper monitor 55 × 55 × 41 (w × h × d) w × h: Cover d: Distance from support ring upper edge to fitted terminal In UP socket, 60 mm, depth … mm 24 V DC (±10 %) II according to EN 60950 (in built-in state) Dry rooms -10 to 50 °C Key switch module, terminal and ribbon cable SECULOGIC TZ300  41  42 SECULOGIC TZ300 SECULOGIC TZ300  43 Germany GEZE Sonderkonstruktionen GmbH Planken … 97944 Boxberg-Schweigern Tel. +49 (0) 7930-9294-0 Fax +49 (0) 7930-9294-10 E-Mail: sk.de@geze.com Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord/Ost Bühringstraße … 13086 Berlin (Weissensee) Tel. +49 (0) 30-47 89 90-0 Fax +49 (0) 30-47 89 90-17 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Nordsternstraße 65 45329 Essen Tel. +49 (0) 201-83082-0 Fax +49 (0) 201-83082-20 E-Mail: essen.de@geze.com Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte Adenauerallee … 61440 Oberursel (b. Frankfurt) Tel. +49 (0) 6171-63610-0 Fax +49 (0) 6171-63610-1 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21-29 71229 Leonberg Tel. +49 (0) 7152-203-594 Fax +49 (0) 7152-203-438 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com Germany GEZE Service GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 25 71229 Leonberg Tel. +49 (0) 7152-9233-0 Fax +49 (0) 7152-9233-60 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Germany GEZE Service GmbH Niederlassung Berlin Bühringstraße … 13086 Berlin (Weissensee) Tel. +49 (0) 30-470217-30 Fax +49 (0) 30-470217-33 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Austria GEZE Austria GmbH Mayrwiesstraße 12 5300 Hallwang b. Salzburg Tel. +43-(0)662-663142 Fax +43-(0)662-663142-15 E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com Baltic States GEZE GmbH Baltic States office Dzelzavas iela 120 S 1021 Riga Tel. +371 (0) 67 89 60 35 Fax +371 (0) 67 89 60 36 E-Mail: office-latvia@geze.com GEZE GmbH P.O.Box 1363 Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. Leemkuil … Industrieterrein Kapelbeemd 5626 EA Eindhoven Tel. +31-(0)40-26290-80 Fax +31-(0)40-26 290-85 E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade Representative Office 61 Pirinski Prohod, entrance „B“, 4th floor, office 5, 1680 Sofia Tel. +359 (0) 24 70 43 73 Fax +359 (0) 24 70 62 62 E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Shuangchenzhong Road Beichen Economic Development Area (BEDA) Tianjin 300400, P.R. China Tel. +86(0)22-26973995-0 Fax +86(0)22-26972702 E-Mail: Sales-info@geze.com.cn China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai Unit 25N, Cross Region Plaza No. 899, Ling Ling Road, XuHui District 200030 Shanghai, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0)21-523 40 960 Fax +86 (0)21-644 72 007 E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou Room 17C3 Everbright Bank Building, No.689 Tian He Bei Road 510630 Guangzhou, P.R. China Tel. +86(0)20-38731842 Fax +86(0)20-38731834 E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing Rm3A02, Building 3, ZhuBang 2000 Business Plaza, No. 98, Balizhuang xili, Chaoyang District, 100025 Beijing, P.R.China Tel. +86-(0)10-8797 5177/-78 Fax +86-(0)10-8797 5171 E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. Pol. Ind. El Pla C/Comerc, 2-22, Nave 12 08980 Sant Feliu de Llobregat (Barcelona) Tel. +34(0)9-02194036 Fax +34(0)9-02194035 E-Mail: info@geze.es India GEZE India Private Ltd. MF2 & 3, Guindy Industrial Estate Ekkattuthangal Chennai - 600 097 Tamilnadu Tel. +91 (0) 44 30 61 69 00 Fax +91 (0) 44 30 61 69 01 E-Mail: office-india@geze.com Italy GEZE Italia Srl Via Giotto, … 20040 Cambiago (MI) Tel. +3902950695-11 Fax +3902950695-33 E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com Italy GEZE Engineering Roma Srl Via Lucrezia Romana, 91 00178 Roma Tel. +3906-7265311 Fax +3906-72653136 E-Mail: roma@geze.biz Kazakhstan GEZE Central Asia 050061, Almaty, Kasakhstan Rayimbek ave. 348, A, office 310 Tel. +7 (0) 72 72 44 78 03 Fax +7 (0) 72 72 44 78 03 E-Mail: office-kazakhstan@geze.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. ul. Annopol 21 03-236 Warszawa Tel. +48 (0)22 440 … 440 Fax +48 (0)22 440 … 400 E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. IRIDE Business Park Building nr. 10, level … Str. Dimitrie Pompei nr. 9–9a RO-020335 Bucharest, sector … Tel. +40 (0) 316 201 257 Fax +40 (0) 316 201 258 E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com France GEZE France S.A.R.L. ZAC de l’Orme Rond RN 19 77170 Servon Tel. +33-(0)1-606260-70 Fax +33-(0)1-606260-71 E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com Russian Federation GEZE GmbH Representative Office Russia Kolodesnij pereulok3, str. 25 Office Nr. 5201-5203 107076 Moskau Tel. +7 (0) 49 55 89 90 52 Fax +7 (0) 49 55 89 90 51 E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. Bartók Béla út 105-113. Budapest H-1115 Tel. +36 (1) 481 4670 Fax +36 (1) 481 4671 E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com Scandinavia GEZE Scandinavia AB Mallslingan 10 Box 7060 18711 Täby, Sweden Tel. +46(0)8-7323-400 Fax +46(0)8-7323-499 E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com Tel.: 0049 7152 203-0 Fax.: 0049 7152 203-310 www.geze.com 137352-00 Scandinavia GEZE Norway Industriveien 34 B 2072 Dal Tel. +47(0)639-57200 Fax +47(0)639-57173 E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com Scandinavia GEZE Finland Postbox 20 15871 Hollola Tel. +358(0)10-4005100 Fax +358(0)10-4005120 E-Mail: finland.se@geze.com Scandinavia GEZE Denmark Høje Taastrup Boulevard 53 2630 Taastrup Tel. +45(0)46-323324 Fax +45(0)46-323326 E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com South Africa DCLSA Distributors (Pty.) Ltd. 118 Richards Drive, Midrand, Halfway House Ext. 111 P.O. Box 7934 Midrand 1685 Tel. +27(0)113158286 Fax +27(0)113158261 E-Mail: info@dclsa.co.za Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG Bodenackerstrasse 79 4657 Dulliken Tel. +41-(0)62-2855400 Fax +41-(0)62-2855401 E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com Turkey GEZE GmbH Türkiye - İstanbul İrtibat Bürosu Ataşehir Bulvarı, Ata 2/3 Plaza Kat: … D: 84 Ataşehir Kadıköy / İstanbul Tel. + 90 (0) 21 64 55 43 15 Fax + 90 (0) 21 64 55 82 15 E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com Ukraine Repräsentanz GEZE GmbH Ukraine ul. Vikentiya Hvoyki, 21, office 151 04080 Kiev Tel. +38 (0) 44 49 97 725 Fax +38 (0) 44 49 97 725 E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East P.O. Box 17903 Jebel Ali Free Zone Dubai Tel. +971(0)4-8833112 Fax +971(0)4-8833240 E-Mail: geze@emirates.net.ae United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. Blenheim Way Fradley Park Lichfield Staffordshire WS13 8SY Tel. +44(0)1543443000 Fax +44(0)1543443001 E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com

Toplock

D 1. Vorbereitung F Türflügel GB I Montageanleitung Schaltschloss 2. Befestigung Blechschraube ST 4,2 x 13mm DIN 7982 Schraube M5 x 12mm DIN 965 3. Schaltschlossachse senkrecht über Achse des Gewindelochs (Treibriegelschloss, Anti-Panik-Gegenkasten) Blindnietmutter M5 nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten 4. Ermittlung der Stangenlänge L Panikgegenkasten Vollblatt Panikgegenkasten Vollblatt mit Stangenantrieb IQ AUT Panikgegenkasten lang Panikgegenkasten lang mit Stangenantrieb IQ AUT L = X - 41 L = X - 604 Panikgegenkasten kurz Panikgegenkasten kurz mit Stangenantrieb IQ AUT L = X - 73 L = X - 636 5. Einschlagen des Gleitstopfens nur im „nichtmontierten“-Zustand. Gewinde am Stangenende nicht beschädigen! 6. Treibriegelstange eindrehen und Schaltschloss montieren. Bei der Montage der Treibriegelstangen muss das Anzugsdrehmoment … - … Nm betragen. 8. Ausrichtung des Schaltschlosses 9. Funktionsprobe L = X - 126 L = X - 672 3-6 mm 7. Bei großer Türluft Stulp unterfüttern Achtung: Schließblech im Bereich des Fallenaufschlages anfasen Zum Einbau des Schaltschlosses dürfen nur Artikel verwendet werden, welche in der Montageanleitung beschrieben sind. Die Anleitungen bzw. Anweisungen müssen vom Monteur an den Benutzer weitergegeben und von diesem bis zum Ende der Nutzung aufbewahrt werden. 1. Die Flügel und der Rahmen des Türelementes müssen aus ausreichend stabilen Werkstoffen (z.B. geschweißter Stahl oder Aluminiumprofil) bestehen. Die Verformung des Türelementes ist so gering zu halten, dass die Funktion der Verschlusselemente nicht beeinträchtigt wird. 2. Es dürfen nur Elemente erstellt werden, deren Flügelhöhe von 3000 mm, Flügelbreite von 1500 mm und Flügelgewicht von 300 kg nicht überschritten wird. 3. Das Verschlusssystem ist nach Feuerwiderstandsklasse EI60 (T60) in zweiflügeligen Stahl- und Aluminiumtüren geprüft. Bei Verklemmung, siehe Abb. … und … 4. Schlüsselbetätigte Halb- oder Doppelzylinder sowie mechanische oder elektronische Knaufzylinder, mit oder ohne Schlüsselbetätigung, haben keinen Einfluss auf die Paniktürfunktion des Schlosses (auch bei steckendem Schlüssel). Lediglich der Knauf eines mechanischen oder elektronischen Knaufzylinders kann in Abhängigkeit von der Knaufform und –größe die Funktion der Stangengriffe beeinflussen. Bei einigen Stangengriffen ist die Gefahr durch Quetschoder Scherstellen gegeben. Deshalb ist es wichtig, dass zwischen der Außenseite des Knaufs bis zum Hebelarm des Stangengriffs, oder eines anderen auslösenden Beschlagteils, ein Freiraum von mindestens 10 mm sichergestellt wird. D GB Installation instructions for switching lock F1. PreparationIof door leaf 2. Fixing self lapping screw screw ST 4,2 x 13mm M5 x 12mm DIN 7982 DIN 965 3. Align axle of switching lock perpendicularly above axle of tapped hole (espagnolette lock, panic keep) riv nut M5 not included 4. Determining the length (L) of the shoot bolt Panic keep full leaf Panic keep full leaf with rod drive IQ AUT Panic keep long Panic keep long with rod drive IQ AUT L = X - 41 L = X - 604 Panic keep short Panic keep short with rod drive IQ AUT L = X - 73 L = X - 636 5. Drive in sliding stopper only in unscrewed status. Do not damage the thread at the end of the bolt 6. Turn shoot bolt in and mount switching lock. During mounting the shoot bolts the locking torque has to be 5-8 Nm. 8. Align switching lock 9. Function test L = X - 126 L = X - 672 3-6 mm 7. Shim forend if there is more door clearance Attention: Chamfer striking plate where latch bolt hits Only use articles which are describe in these instructions. These instructions and directions should be passed to the end user by the installer and keep reliably up to the end of the working life. 1. The leaves and the frame of the door element must be made of sufficiently sturdy materials (e.g. welded steel or aluminum profile). Make sure that any deformation in the door element is kept to a minimum to ensure that the locking element will work properly. 2. The leaf dimensions in the door elements produced may not exceed 3000 mm in height, 1500 mm in width or 300 kg in weight. 3. The locking system complies with fire rating EI60 (T60) for double-leaf steel and aluminum doors. If jammed, see point … and … 4. Key-operated half- or double cylinders as well as mechanical or electronic knob cylinder (with or without key operation) have no effect on the lock’s panic door function (even when the key is inserted). Only the knob of a mechanical or electronic knob cylinder can affect the push bar’s functioning, depending on the knob shape and size. Some push bars pose the risk of pinch or shearing points. That’s why it’s important to keep a clearance of at least 10mm between the outside of the knob up to the lever arm or other activating fitting. Leaving technical details.

EU-Konformitätserklärung FTV320.pdf

User manual IO 420

IO 420 164898-05 161864-03 EN Benutzerhandbuch DE User manual  GEZE IO 420 Contents … 1 About this document … Product description … Further documents … Symbols and illustrations … 2 Safety and responsibility … Fundamental safety precautions … Assigning staff … Product liability … Guidelines … 3 Product overview/installation details … Technical data … LEDs, connections and configuration of the IO 420 … Connection to myGEZE Control … BACnet for GEZE IO 420 … 4 Parameter setting GEZE IO 420 … 10 … Module description … 13 … Module type “watchdog” … 13 Module type “1 door” … 14 Module type “2 doors” … 15 Module type “4 doors” … 16 Module type “automatic stat” / “automatic … sec” … 16 Module type “window” … 18 Module type “universal” … 19 Module type “IQ lock El + Aut” … 20 Module type “RWS + KL” … 22 Module type “DCU1, … and 8” … 24 Module type “DCU6” (revolving door) … 24 Module type “DCU128+RWS+KL” … 24 Module type “MBZ” … 25 … Annex … 27 … EDE lists … 27 State Text … 35 Servicemenü … 36 Passwords for BACnet … 40 … Firmware update for IO 420 … 41 GEZE GEZEIO IO420 420 GEZE IO 420 11 …  Zu Zudiesem diesemDokument Dokument About this documentbeschreibtdie Dieses DiesesBenutzerhandbuch Benutzerhandbuchbeschreibt dieMontage, Montage,Inbetriebnahme Inbetriebnahmeund undParametrierung Parametrierungdes desGEZE GEZEIO IO420. 420. This user manual describes the installation, commissioning and parameter setting ofBenutzerhandbuchs. the GEZE IO 420. Montage und der und nicht Bestandteil dieses Montage undInbetriebnahme Inbetriebnahme derFenster Fenster undTüren Türensind sind nicht Bestandteil dieses Benutzerhandbuchs. Installation and commissioning of the windows and doors are not part of this user manual. … .11 Produktbeschreibung Produktbeschreibung … Product description Mit Mitdem demGEZE GEZEIO IO420 420werden werdenGEZE GEZEKomponenten Komponentenfür fürTürTür-und undFenstersysteme Fenstersystemesowie sowiedas dasRWS-System RWS-Systemvon vonGEZE GEZE With GEZE IODas 420, GEZE components for door and window systems as well as the RWS-system of GEZE are gesteuert. IO 420 zur Vernetzung der und zur nicht busfähigesteuert. Das IO 420ist istein einKoppelmodul Koppelmodul zur Vernetzung derKomponenten Komponenten und zurIntegration Integration nicht busfähi„CLOSED“. The IO 420inin isdas adas coupler module the networking of components and for the integration of non-busger GEZE Benutzerhandbuch werden die einzelnen Modultypen begerKomponenten Komponenten GEZESystem. System.Infor Indiesem diesem Benutzerhandbuch werden die einzelnen Modultypen becompliant components in the GEZEumgesetzt system. This user manual describes the individual module types that can be System werden können. schrieben, die mitdiesem diesem System umgesetzt werden können. schrieben, diemit implemented using this system. … Weitere WeitereDokumente Dokumente … Further documents Im ImLieferumfang Lieferumfangder derKomponenten Komponentensind sindjeweils jeweilsDatenblätter Datenblättermit mittechnischen technischenDaten Datenenthalten. enthalten.Diese Diesesind sindzu zu The components supplied by und GEZE includeDokumente the relevantfinden data sheets with data. These must be heeded. beachten. Alle Sie im Internet beachten. AlleDatenblätter Datenblätter undweitere weitere Dokumente finden Sieauch auch imtechnical Internetunter unterwww.geze.de. www.geze.de. All data sheets and further documents can also be found on the internet at www.geze.com. … Symbole Symboleund undDarstellungsmittel Darstellungsmittel … Symbols and illustrations Warnhinweise Warnhinweise Warning notices InIndieser Anleitung dieser Anleitungwerden werdenWarnhinweise Warnhinweiseverwendet, verwendet,um umSie Sievor vorSachSach-und undPersonenschäden Personenschädenzu zuwarnen. warnen. InXthese instructions, warning notices are used to immer. warn against material damage and injuries. X Lesen und Sie Warnhinweise Lesen undbeachten beachten Siediese diese Warnhinweise immer. X XX Always readSie and observe these warning notices. Befolgen alle Maßnahmen, die Befolgen Sie alle Maßnahmen, diemit mitdem demWarnsymbol Warnsymbolund undWarnwort Warnwortgekennzeichnet gekennzeichnetsind. sind. X Observe all measures marked with the warning symbol and warning word . Warnsymbol Bedeutung Warnsymbol Warnwort Warnwort Bedeutung Warning symbol Warning word Meaning zur Informationen Informationen zurVermeidung Vermeidungvon vonSachschäden, Sachschäden,zum zumVerständnis Verständnisoder oderzum zumOptimieOptimieVORSICHT VORSICHT ren der –– to prevent property damage, to understand or optimise the renInformation derArbeitsabläufe. Arbeitsabläufe. CAUTION – operation sequences. Weitere WeitereSymbole Symboleund undDarstellungsmittel Darstellungsmittel Further illustrations Um korrekte Bedienung zu Umdie diesymbols korrekteand Bedienung zuverdeutlichen, verdeutlichen,sind sindwichtige wichtigeInformationen Informationenund undtechnische technischeHinweise Hinweisebesonders besonders Important information and technical notes are highlighted to explain correct operation. herausgestellt. herausgestellt. Symbol Symbol Symbol Meaning Bedeutung Bedeutung means “important note” bedeutet „Wichtiger Hinweis“ bedeutet „Wichtiger Hinweis“ means “additional Information” bedeutet „Zusätzliche Information“ bedeutet „Zusätzliche Information“ X XX Symbol Handlung: Hier müssen tun. Symbol für eine Handlung: Hieryou müssen Sie etwas tun. Symbol forfür aneine action: This means haveSie to etwas do something. Sie bei Halten Sie beimehreren mehreren Handlungsschritten dieReihenfolge Reihenfolge ein. If Halten there are several actions Handlungsschritten to be taken, keep to die the given order. ein. Abkürzungen Abkürzungen Abbreviations ANSI American ANSI AmericanNational NationalStandards StandardsInstitute Institute ANSI American National Standards Institute APDU application layer unit APDU application layerprotocol protocoldata data unit APDU application layer protocol data unit B/IP BACnet/IP broadcasting management device B/IP BACnet/IP broadcasting management device B/IP broadcasting management device BACnet Building Control BACnet BACnet/IP BuildingAutomation Automationand and Controlnetworks networks BACnet Building Automation and Control networks BBMD BACnet/IP broadcasting management device BBMD BACnet/IP broadcasting management device BMA Fire alarm Interoperability system BIBBs BACnet BIBBs BACnet InteroperabilityBuilding BuildingBlocks Blocks COV change of value BMA Brandmeldanlage BMA Brandmeldanlage CP Capacitor plate (capacitor power) COV change COV changeof ofvalue value DCC Device communication(capacitor control power) CP Kondensatorplatine CP Kondensatorplatine (capacitor power) EDE Engineering Data Exchange DCC Device control DCC Devicecommunication communication control IQEDE Lock lock for the passive leaf Engineering Data Exchange EDE Aut Motor Engineering Data Exchange IQIQ Lock ELAut lock Motorschloss für IQLock Lock AutMotor Motorschloss fürden denStandflügel Standflügel KLIQ220 box 220 Motorschloss IQLock LockELEL Terminal Motorschloss KZF release KL Klemmenbox 220 KL220 220 Short-term Klemmenbox 220 MAC medium access control KZF Kurzzeitfreiagbe KZF Kurzzeitfreiagbe MAC MAC 22 … .11 MBZ MS/TP MS/TP MS/TP NC NC NC NO NO NO PICS PICS RWA RWA RWA SCT SCT SCT STST 220 ST220 220 TZTZ 320 320 TZ 320 TETE 200 TE200 200 VAT 220 VAT 220 VAT 220 ZSU ZSU ZSU GF GF GF SF SFSF BMA BMA BMA RWS RWS RWS Master MasterSlave SlaveToken TokenPassing Passing Master Slave Token Passingclosed) Öffnerkontakt (normally Öffnerkontakt (normally closed) normally closed contact (normally closed) Schließerkontakt (normally open) Schließerkontakt (normally open) normally opened contact (normally open) Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement Smoke and heat extraction system Rauchund Wärmeabzug Rauchund Wärmeabzug Key switch Schlüsselschalter Schlüsselschalter Service terminal Service-Terminal Service-Terminal Door control unit Türzentrale 320 Türzentrale 320320 Control panel 200200 Tableaueinheit Tableaueinheit 200 Virtual display indicator board Virtuelles Anzeigetableau Virtuelles Anzeigetableau Timer Zeitschaltuhr Zeitschaltuhr Active leaf Gangflügel Gangflügel Passive leaf Standflügel Standflügel Fire alarm system Brandmeldeanlage Brandmeldeanlage Emergency exit system Rettungswegsystem Rettungswegsystem medium mediumaccess accesscontrol control Sicherheit Sicherheitund undVerantwortung Verantwortung Grundlegende GrundlegendeSicherheitshinweise Sicherheitshinweise XX Nur NurGEZE-Originalteile GEZE-Originalteilefür fürReparaturarbeiten Reparaturarbeitenverwenden. verwenden. XX Eigenmächtige EigenmächtigeVeränderungen Veränderungenan ander derAnlage Anlageschließen schließeneine eineHaftung Haftungvon vonGEZE GEZEfür fürdaraus darausresultierende resultierende Schäden Schädenaus. aus. XX Primärseitige PrimärseitigeSchutzmaßnahmen Schutzmaßnahmenerfolgen erfolgenbauseits. bauseits. XX Bei Beider derLeitungsverlegung Leitungsverlegungmüssen müssendie dieNormen NormenVDE VDE0100 0100und undVDE VDE0815 0815beachtet beachtetwerden. werden. 33 …  GEZE IO 420 … Safety and responsibility … Fundamental safety precautions Use only original GEZE parts for repair work. Unauthorised changes to the system exclude GEZE‘s liability for any resulting damage. X Primary protective measures are to be carried out on site. X Follow the VDE 0100 and VDE 0815 standards when laying the cables X X … Assigning staff Installation, commissioning and repair work must be performed by properly trained personnel authorised by GEZE. … Product liability In compliance with the manufacturer’s product liability as defined in the German „Product Liability Act“, the instructions included here must be noted and followed. Failure to comply releases the manufacturer from his statutory liability. Only experts authorised by GEZE may carry out installation, functional checks and maintenance work. … Guidelines The GEZE IO 420 fulfils the following standards: à DIN EN 61000-6-2: 2005 (in accordance with VDE 0839 Part 6-2 / March 2006) à DIN EN 61000-6-6: 2007+ A1:2011 in accordance with VDE 0839 Part 6-3 / September 2011 … GEZE IO 420 …  Product overview/installation details Technical data Device name: Function: Installation: Main dimensions [mm] (W x H x D): Operating voltage: Induced current intake: Total power consumption: Output current (pin … and 2): Contact rating for relay: Operating temperature [°C]: Safety fuse: … IO 420 universal IO modules Top hat rail mounting 107 x 111 x 59 24 V DC +/-15 % with reverse polarity protection max. 300 mA at 24 V … A at 24 V max. … A at 24 V … A at 30 V -20 to 80°C F900: Value … A LEDs, connections and configuration of the IO 420 Fig. 1: LEDs and connections GEZE IO 420 … .1 LEDs LED … - (red) LED … - (yellow) LED … - (red) LED … - (green) LED … - (green) LED … - (yellow) LED in - (green) LED out - (red) LED flashes if the microSD card is read or written. LED lights up if “CP” (capacitor plate) is connected. LED flashes in case of a fault. LED flashes during normal operation. LED lights up if voltage supply for microcontroller is active. LED flashes if data is exchanged via BACnet. LED-in 4/3/2/1 lights up if input “in” 4/3/2/1 is active. LED-out 4/3/2/1 lights up if output “out” 4/3/2/1 is active. … LED … - (gelb) LED in - (grün) LED out - (rot)  LED blinkt, wenn Daten über BACnet ausgetauscht werden. LED-in 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Eingang “in” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. LED-out 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Ausgang “out” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. … .2 Schnittstellen / GEZE IO 420 … .2 Schnittstellen Interfaces / GEZEà IOCAN: 42050 kBit/s, verwendet für TE 200, VAT 220, TZ 320. Interfaces à ST 220: verwendet für ST 220, IQ-Aut Standflügel. àà CAN: 50 kBit/s, used for für CAN bus capable automatic doors and door control units from GEZE. GEZE-Bus: verwendet IQ-Aut Gangflügel. àà ST 220: used for ST 220, IQ-Aut passive leaf. BACnet: verwendet für BACnet MS/TP-Schnittstelle. à GEZE-Bus: used for IQ-Aut active leaf. à BACnet: used for BACnet MS/TP interface. … .3 DIP-Schalter Konfiguration … .3 CAN: DIP switch configuration Abschlusswiderstand „CAN“ 120 Ohm CAN: BACnet: BACnet: GEZE-Bus: GEZE-Bus: Network-Bias: Network bias: GEZE IO 420 X DIP-Schalter am Anfang und Ende des CAN-BUS auf ON setzen. Terminating resistor “CAN” 120 Ohm Abschlusswiderstand „BACnet“ 120 Ohm X Set the DIP switch at the start and end of the CAN-BUS to ON. X BACnet DIP-Schalter am ersten und am letzen IO 420 des BACnet MS/TP Bus auf ON setzen. Terminating “BACnet” 120 Ohm DIP-Schalterresistor Abschlusswiderstand „GEZE-Bus“ 120 Ohm X Set the BACnet DIP switch on the first and last IO 420 of the BACnet MS/TP bus to ON. X Bei Anschluss von GEZE-Motorschloss oder TZ 320 (Anschluss für KL 220), DIP-Schalter auf DIP switch terminating resistor “GEZE-Bus” 120 Ohm ON setzen. When GEZE motor lock or TZ 320 (connection for KL 220) is connected, set DIP switch to ON. DIP-Schalter „Network-Bias“ DIP switch “Network bias” für BACnet MS/TP zu aktivieren, DIP-Schalter auf ON setzen. X Um den Network-Bias X Set the DIP switch to ON to enable the network bias for BACnet MS/TP. In einem BACnet MS/TP Netwerksystem darf nur ein Bias aktiviert sein. Only one bias may be enabled in a BACnet MS/TP network system. X … .4 microSD … .4 microSD microSD-Card microSD card Die microSD-Card (SDHC) wird im FAT16/32-Fileformat geschrieben und gelesen. Andere Formate The microSD (SDHC) isDie written anddes readIOin420 thekönnen FAT16/32 format. Other formats arewerden. not supwerden nichtcard unterstützt. Dateien auffile eine microSD-Card kopiert ported. 420STfiles be copied to a microSDkönnen card. The 220 isam required for this. The data can HierfürThe wirdIOdas 220can benötigt. Gegebenenfalls dieSTDaten PC weiter angepasst werden be adapted further at the PC if necessary (parameter setting or change in BACnet name). A microSD (Parametrierung oder Änderung der BACnet-Namen). Das Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf card can thenIO be420 used load theFirmware profile togeladen anotherwerden. IO 420 with the same firmware. ein anderes mittogleicher The following files are created card: Folgende Dateien werden auf on derthe Karte erstellt: à à Name file for BACnet names: “IO420_V1.BAC”; Namensdatei für BACnet-Namen: „IO420_V1.BAC“; à à Configuration file: “IO420_V1.CON”; contains all parameters of thedes IO 420. Konfigurationsdatei: „IO420_V1.CON“; beinhaltet alle Parameter IO 420. à à Log file: “IO420_00.LOG” to “IO420_39.LOG” ; Log-Datei: „IO420_00.LOG“ bis „IO420_39.LOG“; Depending on the setting, messages and areinwritten into thegeschrieben. log file. Je nach Einstellung werdenalarm Alarmmeldungen undactions Aktionen die Log-Datei IfWenn the LED microSD card is flashing, the microSD card must not be taken outSlot of the slot. diefor LED für microSD-Card blinkt, darf die microSD-Card nicht aus dem herausgenommen werden. The IOEntfernen 420 must und be de-energised formicroSD-Card the microSD card and inserted. Zum Einstecken der das to IO be 420removed spannungslos schalten. … .5 … .5 Reset Reset Reset push Reset-Taster button The settings can be restored using the reset push button. werden. Mitfactory dem Reset-Taster kann die Werkseinstellung wiederhergestellt Carrying out a reset Reset durchführen X De-energise the device. X Gerät spannungslos schalten. X Keep the reset button pressed on the printed circuit board. X „Reset-Button“ auf der Platine gedrückt halten. X Switch the voltage supply on. X Spannungsversorgung einschalten. The device is restored todas theGerät factory after … seconds. Nach … Sekunden wird aufsettings Werkseinstellung versetzt. LED … “fault” and LED … “normal mode” flash simultaneously in … second cycle. LED … „Störung“ und LED … „Normalbetrieb“ blinken im 0,4 Sekunden-Takt gleichzeitig. X Release the reset button when the LEDs start to flash. X Wenn die LEDs blinken „Reset-Button“ loslassen. X To return the device to operating mode, switch the voltage supply off and on again. X Um das Gerät in den Betriebsmodus zurückzusetzen, Spannungsversorgung aus- und wieder einschalten. … Connection to myGEZE Control The IO 420 interface module can be used in conjunction with the myGEZE Control building automation system as a remote device for detecting digital inputs and outputs. … IO 420 is connected to myGEZE Control via a CAN bus connection. à Modul type: universal For this application, the IO 420 interface module must be configured in the universal module type. See also „ … Modul type „universal“. à Assignment of CAN addresses During configuration, note that an IO 420 interface module occupies … CAN addresses on the bus system. à 1. CAN-Adr.: Inputs and Outputs … + … à 2. CAN-Adr.: Inputs and Outputs … + … à Parameter setting of the inputs … GEZE IO 420  The inputs can be configured in two different ways: The connected signal is detected and output on the CAN bus. The outputs of the IO 420 can be freely used in the setting. The connected signal is detected and output on the CAN bus. In this configuration, the outputs of the IO 420 are automatically controlled by the inputs and cannot be used freely. FEEDBACK SWITCH GEZE IO 420 … Zu diesem Dokument Fig. 2: Remote inputs and outputs with GEZE IO 420 Dieses Benutzerhandbuch beschreibt die Montage, Inbetriebnahme und Parametrierung des GEZE IO 420. und Inbetriebnahme Fenster und Türen sind nicht Bestandteil dieses Benutzerhandbuchs. 3.4Montage BACnet for GEZE IOder420 Produktbeschreibung Networked MS/TP devices When MS/TP devices areGEZE networked, the linefür topology must always be observed. ToRWS-System avoid branchvon lines, each IO Mit dem GEZE IO 420 werden Komponenten Tür- und Fenstersysteme sowie das GEZE 420 has two BACnet connections. gesteuert. Das IO 420 ist ein Koppelmodul zur Vernetzung der Komponenten und zur Integration nicht busfähiger Komponenten in das GEZE System. In diesem Benutzerhandbuch werden die einzelnen Modultypen beschrieben, die mit diesem System umgesetzt werden können. Weitere Dokumente Im Lieferumfang der Komponenten sind jeweils Datenblätter mit technischen Daten enthalten. Diese sind zu beachten. Alle Datenblätter und weitere Dokumente finden Sie auch im Internet unter www.geze.de. … Symbole und Darstellungsmittel Warnhinweise In dieser Anleitung werden Warnhinweise verwendet, um Sie vor Sach- und Personenschäden zu warnen. X Lesen und beachten Sie diese Warnhinweise immer. Gebäudemanagementsystem X Befolgen Sie alle Maßnahmen, die mit dem Warnsymbol und Warnwort gekennzeichnet sind. Building Management Warnsymbol Warnwort – VORSICHT System Bedeutung Informationen zur Vermeidung von Sachschäden, zum Verständnis oder zum Optimieren der Arbeitsabläufe. Weitere Symbole und Darstellungsmittel BMS Um die korrekte Bedienung zu verdeutlichen, sind wichtige Informationen und technische Hinweise besonders herausgestellt. Symbol Bedeutung Fig. 3: Wiring of BACnet MS/TP and setting of terminating resistor and network bias. bedeutet „Wichtiger Hinweis“ Only one bias„Zusätzliche may be activated in a BACnet MS/TP network system. bedeutet Information“ Symbol für eine Handlung: Hier müssen Sie etwas tun. Halten Sie bei mehreren Handlungsschritten die Reihenfolge ein. X Abkürzungen ANSI APDU B/IP BACnet American National Standards Institute application layer protocol data unit BACnet/IP broadcasting management device Building Automation and Control networks MS/TP NC NO PICS Master Slave Token Passing Öffnerkontakt (normally closed) Schließerkontakt (normally open) Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement …  GEZE IO 420 A BACnet MS/TP network requires one active network-bias. The “BACnet” terminating resistor built inside the device must be switched on at the beginning and end of the bus using the respective DIP switch. Maximum 32 MS/TP devices can be connected in one segment. The wiring must meet or exceed the BACnet and MS/TP EIA-485 network standard and be specified as follows: à Shielded cable, pair-wise twisted. à Impedance 100-130 Ohm. à Capacity between the wires < 100 pF/m (30 pF/ft). à Capacity between the wire and the shield < 200 pF/m (60 pF/ft). à The maximum length of any individual segment is 900 m (AWG18 cable; wire cross-section … mm²). With large cable lengths, an amplifier may have to be integrated in the bus to guarantee function. Standard setting of the interface: à à à à Baud rate: … kB Data bit: … Stop bit: … Parity: none The following BACnet object types are used for the GEZE IO 420: à Device object (one object) à Binary input (up to four objects) à Multi state value (up to ten objects) à Notification class object (one object)) … .1 Object structure of BACnet for GEZE IO 420 The IO 420 offers 14 module types, each of which can be used with up to 22 objects or in the software version IO 420 MBZ. The BACnet objects are adapted to the selected module type. The respective EDE lists can be found in the annex to this document. … .2 Index Project Instance number Description … Device object … contains the device description. … 3 … 5 multistate value multistate value Binary input Binary input … 2 … 2 shows the current module type. shows the current alarm message. … 7 … 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 multistate value multistate value Notification class object multistate value multistate value Binary input Binary input multistate value multistate value multistate value multistate value multistate value multistate value multistate value … 4 … 5 … 3 … 7 … 9 10 11 12 13 Status message Command Object for alarm message Status message Command 20 21 multistate value multistate value 14 15 Command Command 22 multistate value 16 Command assigned differently depending on the module type assigned differently depending on the module type Status message Command Status message Command alarm … for DCU alarm … for DCU alarm … for DCU Changing the object description The object description is changed through the BACnet connection. Any BACnet configurator can be used for this purpose. … 16.Multistate value 12 =not_used; 17.Multistate value 13 =not_used; 18.Multistate value 14 =not_used; 19.Multistate value 15 =not_used; GEZE IO 420 21.Notification class =xxxyyy; END OF FILE … … .3 … .4  Changing the BACnet parameters DerIO Titelteil einschließlich „=“ Zeichen darf geändert werden. Das „=“terminal fungiert ST hier220 alsor Trennzeichen The 420 has four BACnetdem parameters which cannicht be set using the GEZE service by editing the zwischen Titel BACnet-Namen. Der Namen configuration fileund at the PC using the microSD card.der einzelnen BACnet-Objekte darf geändert werden. Hierbei gilt beachten, dass die Zeile mit einem endet und dernot Name nicht mehr als 32 Zeichen enthält. Die àzuDevice ID: must be unambiguous in Semikolon the BACnet„;“ network. It may be allocated twice. vonmust Sonderzeichen ist nicht erlaubt, Leerzeichen, Unterstrich, Bindestrich, Punkt àVerwendung MAC address: be unambiguous in an MS/TPausgenommen network. Komma. àund Baud rate: … kB (standard setting). à Instance number of “notification class object”: The IO 420 only has one “notification class object” since there is only one object for GEZE alarm messages. Parametrierung IO 420In the factory setting, multi state value #2 is allocated to this, but it can be changed by the user. The value range is between … and 90. Die erste Parametrierung des IO 420 sollte grundsätzlich mit Hilfe des GEZE Serviceterminals ST 220 erfolgen. Einmal eingestellt kann die Konfigurationsdatei „IO420_V1.CON“ auf eine microSD-Card kopiert und gegebenenfalls Changing the object name am PC weiter angepasst werden. Das so erstellte Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf ein anderes IO 420 mit change gleicherisFirmware geladen werden. This carried out by editing the name file “IO420.BAC” at the PC (microSD card). diefor LED für microSD-Card blinkt, darf die microSD-Card nicht dem herausgenommen IfWenn the LED microSD card is flashing, the microSD card must not be aus taken outSlot of the slot. The IO 420 werden. must Zum Entfernen und Einstecken microSD-Card dasand IO 420 spannungslos schalten. be de-energised for the microSDder card to be removed inserted. der Modifizierung derbeen Konfigurationsdatei am PC sind folgende Punktemust zu beachten: XBei After the name file has edited and entered, the following function be carried out in the service à menu Der Parametername „=“ Zeichen darf --> nicht geändertSD werden. Das „=“ fungiert hier als for the changeseinschließlich to be applied:dem “Parameter SD-Card” “BAC-Name -> IO420”. Trennzeichen zwischen Titelteil und Wert. of BACnet object à Title Der Parameter-Wert darfName nur Zahlen enthalten. à 0.Device Die in den Klammern Angegebenen min./max. Werte beachten. object =BAC-PR47-232; 1.binary input … =GEZE047AE1E2EL32B125000801; 2.binary input … =GEZE047AE1E2EL32B225000801; Parametername Wert Beschreibung 3.binary input … =not_used; 0.CAN_ADDR1(0~63) = 1; CAN-Adresse für Tür #1 4.binary input … =not_used; 1.CAN_ADDR2(0~63) = 0; CAN-Adresse für Tür #2 5.Multistate value … =module_type; 2.CAN_ADDR3(0~63) = 0; CAN-Adresse für Tür #3 6.Multistate value … =GEZE047AE1E2EL32A106000801; 3.CAN_ADDR4(0~63) = 0; CAN-Adresse für Tür #4 7.Multistate value … =TZ320_state; 4.BACNET_MACADR(0~127) = 1; BACnet MAC-Adresse 8.Multistate value … =TZ320_command; 5.BACNET_DEVICEID(1~4194303) = 1; BACnet DEVICE -ID 9.Multistate value … =alarm_details; 6.BACNET_BAUDRATE(0~6) = 5; … = nicht aktiv 2= 19,2 kB 4= 57,6 kB 6= 115,2 kB 10.Multistate value … =not_used; 1= 9,6 kB 3= 38,4 kB 5= 76,8 kB 11.Multistate value … =not_used; 7.BACNET_NOTIFYCLASS(1~90) = 50; Instanznummer des Notification class object. 12.Multistate value … =not_used; 8.VALUE_UTC_OFFSET(0~780) = 60; UTC-Zeit offset in Minuten; Betragswert ohne Vorzeichen; (z. B. DE = 60 Min.) 13.Multistate value … =not_used; 9.SIGN_UTC_OFFSET(1:-/0:+) = 1; Vorzeichen für UTC-Offset. … : negativer Offset 14.Multistate value 10 =not_used; 0: positiver Offset 15.Multistate value 11 =not_used; Offset = [UTC] - [local time], daher hat Deutschland einen negativen Wert. 16.Multistate value 12 =not_used; 10.CONF_OUTPUT3(0~4) = 0; Konfiguration von Ausgang … und … bei Türlösung 17.Multistate value 13 =not_used; 11.CONF_OUTPUT4(0~4) = 0; 0: Ausgang inaktiv 3: Geschlossen 18.Multistate value 14 =not_used; 1: Alarm 4: Verriegelt und Geschlossen. 19.Multistate value 15 =not_used; 2: Verriegelt 21.Notification class =xxxyyy; Der gültige Wertbereich für den jeweiligen Eingang ist je nach Modultyp anders. 12.INPUT1_TYPE(0~10) = 10; END OF FILE … Die folgende Liste dient zu Entschlüsselung der Nummern. Die Änderung der 13.INPUT2_TYPE(0~10) = 10; 14.INPUT3_TYPE(0~12) = 10; Eingänge muss über das GEZE Serviceterminal ST 220 erfolgen. 15.INPUT4_TYPE(0~12) = 10; inaktiv 7: Standflügel geschlossen The title part including the “=” sign must not0:be changed. The “=” has the function of separating the title and 1: Gangflügel entriegelt 8: KZF-GF (Befehl) BACnet name. The name of the individual BACnet devices may be changed. Care must be taken that the line ends 2: Gangflügel-entriegeln (Befehl) 9: ZSU-Master with a semicolon „;“ and the name does not3:contain 32 characters. Special characters may not be used, KZF-GF more und SFthan (Befehle) 10: Schalter-Funktion with the exception of space, underscore, hyphen, full stop and comma. 4: Gangflügel geschlossen 11: BMA für Universalmodul (Schließer) 5: BMA (Öffner) 12: RWA für Universalmodul (Schließer) 6: RWA (Öffner) 16.KZF1_ABORT(0/1) = 0; 17.KZF1_AFTERTRG(0/1) = 0; 18.KZF1_TIME(3~30) 19.KZF2_ABORT(0/1) = = 10; 0; 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 ist nicht unterbrechbar 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 ist unterbrechbar 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 kann nicht nachgetriggert werden 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 kann nachgetriggert werden Kurzzeitfreigabezeit Tür #1 (3 bis 30 Sekunden) 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #2 ist nicht unterbrechbar 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #2 ist unterbrechbar … 9 zwischen Titel und BACnet-Namen. Der Namen der einzelnen BACnet-Objekte darf geändert werden. Hierbei gilt zu beachten, dass die Zeile mit einem Semikolon „;“ endet und der Name nicht mehr als 32 Zeichen enthält. Die Verwendung von Sonderzeichen ist nicht erlaubt, ausgenommen Leerzeichen, Unterstrich, Bindestrich, Punkt und Komma.  GEZE IO 420 … 4 Parametrierung GEZE IO 420 Parameter setting des GEZE IOsollte 420grundsätzlich mit Hilfe des GEZE Serviceterminals ST 220 erfolgen. EinDie erste Parametrierung IO 420 malfirst eingestellt kann die Konfigurationsdatei auf terminal eine microSD-Card kopiert undbe gegebenenfalls The time parameters are set for the IO 420,„IO420_V1.CON“ the GEZE service ST 220 should always used. Once am PC weiter angepasst werden. Das so erstellte kann to dann mittels card microSD-Card auf further ein anderes 420 entered, the configuration file “IO420_V1.CON” can Profil be copied a microSD and adapted at theIOPC if mit gleicher Firmwarecard geladen werden. necessary. A microSD can then be used to load this profile to another IO 420 with the same firmware. diefor LED für microSD-Card blinkt, darf die microSD-Card nicht dem herausgenommen werden. IfWenn the LED microSD card is flashing, the microSD card must not be aus taken outSlot of the slot. Zum Einstecken der das IO 420removed spannungslos schalten. The IOEntfernen 420 must und be de-energised formicroSD-Card the microSD card to be and inserted. Bei following der Modifizierung der be Konfigurationsdatei amthe PC configuration sind folgendefile Punkte zu beachten: The points must remembered when is modified at the PC: Derparameter Parametername einschließlich dem „=“must Zeichen nicht geändert Das „=“ fungiert hier alsthe àà The name including the “=” sign not darf be changed. The “=”werden. has the function of separating Trennzeichen zwischen title part and the value. Titelteil und Wert. Derparameter Parameter-Wert darf only nur Zahlen àà The value may containenthalten. numbers. Die inthe den Klammern Angegebenen min./max. Werte beachten. àà Heed min./max. values given in brackets. Parametername Parameter name … 10 Wert Description Beschreibung Value 0.CAN_ADDR1(0~63) 0.CAN_ADDR1(0~63) 1.CAN_ADDR2(0~63) 1.CAN_ADDR2(0~63) 2.CAN_ADDR3(0~63) 2.CAN_ADDR3(0~63) 3.CAN_ADDR4(0~63) 3.CAN_ADDR4(0~63) 4.BACNET_MACADR(0~127) 4.BACNET_MACADR(0~127) 5.BACNET_DEVICEID(1~4194303) 5.BACNET_DEVICEID(1~4194303) 6.BACNET_BAUDRATE(0~6) 6.BACNET_BAUDRATE(0~6) == == == == == == == 1;1; 0;0; 0;0; 0;0; 1;1; 1;1; 5;5; 7.BACNET_NOTIFYCLASS(1~90) 7.BACNET_NOTIFYCLASS(1~90) 8.VALUE_UTC_OFFSET(0~780) 8.VALUE_UTC_OFFSET(0~780) 9.SIGN_UTC_OFFSET(1:-/0:+) 9.SIGN_UTC_OFFSET(1:-/0:+) 50; == 50; 60; == 60; == 1;1; 10.CONF_OUTPUT3(0~4) 10.CONF_OUTPUT3(0~4) 11.CONF_OUTPUT4(0~4) 11.CONF_OUTPUT4(0~4) == 0;0; == 0;0; 12.INPUT1_TYPE(0~10) 12.INPUT1_TYPE(0~10) 13.INPUT2_TYPE(0~10) 13.INPUT2_TYPE(0~10) 14.INPUT3_TYPE(0~12) 14.INPUT3_TYPE(0~12) 15.INPUT4_TYPE(0~12) 15.INPUT4_TYPE(0~12) == == == == 10; 10; 10; 10; 10; 10; 10; 10; 16.KZF1_ABORT(0/1) = 0; 16.KZF1_ABORT(0/1) 17.KZF1_AFTERTRG(0/1) == 0;0; 17.KZF1_AFTERTRG(0/1) 18.KZF1_TIME(3~30) 19.KZF2_ABORT(0/1) 18.KZF1_TIME(3~30) 19.KZF2_ABORT(0/1) == 0;10; = 0; = 10; = 0; 20.KZF2_AFTERTRG.(0/1) = 0; 21.KZF2_TIME(3~30) 22.KZF3_ABORT(0/1) = = 10; 0; CAN-Adresse fürdoor Tür #1 CAN address for CAN-Adresse fürdoor Tür #2 CAN address for CAN-Adresse fürdoor Tür #3 CAN address for CAN-Adresse fürdoor Tür #4 CAN address for BACnetMAC MAC-Adresse BACnet address BACnetDEVICE-ID DEVICE -ID BACnet nicht aktiv 2= … 19,2kB kB 4= … 57,6kB kB 6= … 115,2kB kB 00==not active 2= 4= 6= 1= … 9,6kB kB 3= … 38,4kB kB 5= … 76,8kB kB 1= 3= 5= Instanznummer Notification class object. Instance number des of the notification class object. UTC-Zeit offsetin inminutes; Minuten;amount Betragswert ohne Vorzeichen; (z.EN B. DE = min.) 60 Min.) UTC time offset shown without sign (e.g. = 60 Vorzeichen UTC-Offset. Sign for UTC für offset. : negativer Offset 11: negative offset positiver Offset 0:0:positive offset Offset==[UTC] [UTC]- -[local [localtime], time],which daherishat Deutschland einen negativen Wert. Offset why Germany has a negative value. Konfigurationofvon Ausgang bei Türlösung Configuration output … and3 4und for 4door solution Ausgang inaktiv Geschlossen 0:0:Output inactive 3:3:Closed Alarm Verriegelt Geschlossen. 1:1:Alarm 4:4:Locked andund closed. Verriegelt 2:2:Locked Dervalid gültige Wertbereich für respective den jeweiligen ist je nach Modultyp anders. The value range for the inputEingang varies depending on the module Die folgende Liste dient zu Entschlüsselung der Nummern. Die Änderung der type. Eingänge muss dasto GEZE Serviceterminal ST 220 erfolgen. The following listüber is used decipher the numbers. Changes to the inputs must be made using the GEZE service terminal ST 220. 0: inaktiv 7: Standflügel geschlossen Gangflügel entriegelt KZF-GFleaf (Befehl) 0:1:inactive 7:8:Passive closed Gangflügel-entriegeln (Befehl) ZSU-Master 1:2:Active leaf unlocked 8:9:KZF-AL (command) KZF-GFactive und SF (Befehle) Schalter-Funktion 2:3:Unlock leaf (command) 9:10: Time switch (ZSU) master Gangflügelrelease geschlossen 11:Switch BMA für Universalmodul (Schließer) 3:4:Short-term (KZF) active leaf 10: function 5: BMA 12:Fire RWA für Universalmodul (Schließer) (AL) and (Öffner) passive leaf (IL) (commands) 11: alarm system for universal module RWA (Öffner) 4:6:Active leaf closed (closer) 5:0:Fire alarm system (electric 12: RWA for universal module (closer) Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 iststrike) nicht unterbrechbar 6:1:RWA (electric strike) Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 ist unterbrechbar 0:0:Short-term releaseTür door notnicht interruptible Kurzzeitfreigabe #1#1 kann nachgetriggert werden 1:1:Short-term releaseTür door interruptible Kurzzeitfreigabe #1#1 kann nachgetriggert werden 0:Kurzzeitfreigabezeit Short-term release door #1(3 cannot triggered later Tür #1 bis 30be Sekunden) 1: Short-term release door #1 can be triggered later 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #2 ist nicht unterbrechbar Short-term release time (3 to 30 seconds) 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür door #2 ist #1 unterbrechbar 0: Short-term release door #2 not interruptible 1: Short-term release door #2 interruptible 0: Short-term release door #2 cannot be triggered later 1: Short-term release door #2 can be triggered later Short-term release time door #2 (3 to 30 seconds) 0: Short-term release door #3 not interruptible 1: Short-term release door #3 interruptible GEZE IO 420  23.KZF3_AFTERTRG.(0/1) = 0; 24.KZF3_TIME(3~30) 25.KZF4_ABORT(0/1) = = 10; 0; 26.KZF4_AFTERTRG.(0/1) = 0; 27.KZF4_TIME(3~30) 28. ADJ_DAY_LIGHT_SAVING (0/1) = = 10; 1; 29.not_used = 0; 30.AL_SUPPR_DUR(0~250) 31.AL_DELAY_TIME(0~250) 32.MODULETYPE(0~15) = = = 50; 100; 10; 33.LOGFILE_LEVEL(0~2) = 0; 34.ZSUMASTER1_ACTIVITY(0/1) = 0; 35.ZSUMASTER1_SUNDAY(0/1) 36.ZSUMASTER1_MONDAY(0/1) 37.ZSUMASTER1_TUESDAY(0/1) 38.ZSUMASTER1_WEDNESDA(0/1) 39.ZSUMASTER1_THURSDAY(0/1) 40.ZSUMASTER1_FRIDAY(0/1) 41.ZSUMASTER1_SATURDAY(0/1) 42.ZSUMASTER1_START_HH(0~23) 43.ZSUMASTER1_START_MM(0~59) 44.ZSUMASTER1_END_HH(0~23) 45.ZSUMASTER1_END_MM(0~59) 46.ZSUMASTER2_ACTIVITY(0/1) = = = = = = = = = = = = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; = = = = = = = 54.ZSUMASTER2_START_HH(0~23) = 55.ZSUMASTER2_START_MM(0~59) = 56.ZSUMASTER2_END_HH(0~23) = 57.ZSUMASTER2_END_MM(0~59) = 58.ZSUMASTER3_ACTIVITY(0/1) = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 59.ZSUMASTER3_SUNDAY(0/1) 60.ZSUMASTER3_MONDAY(0/1) 61.ZSUMASTER3_TUESDAY(0/1) 62.ZSUMASTER3_WEDNESDAY(0/1) 63.ZSUMASTER3_THURSDAY(0/1) 64.ZSUMASTER3_FRIDAY(0/1) 65.ZSUMASTER3_SATURDAY(0/1) 66.ZSUMASTER3_START_HH(0~23) 67.ZSUMASTER3_START_MM(0~59) 68.ZSUMASTER3_END_HH(0~23) 69.ZSUMASTER3_END_MM(0~59) 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 47.ZSUMASTER2_SUNDAY(0/1) 48.ZSUMASTER2_MONDAY(0/1) 49.ZSUMASTER2_TUESDAY(0/1) 50.ZSUMASTER2_WEDNESDAY(0/1) 51.ZSUMASTER2_THURSDAY(0/1) 52.ZSUMASTER2_FRIDAY(0/1) 53.ZSUMASTER2_SATURDAY(0/1) = = = = = = = = = = = 0; 0; 0; 0: Short-term release door #3 cannot be triggered later 1: Short-term release door #3 can be triggered later Short-term release time door #3 (3 to 30 seconds) 0: Short-term release door #4 not interruptible 1: Short-term release door #4 interruptible 0: Short-term release door #4 cannot be triggered later 1: Short-term release door #4 can be triggered later Short-term release time door #4 (3 to 30 seconds) 0: automatic switch over between summer and winter time is disabled. 1: automatic switch over between summer and winter time is enabled. Duration of the alarm suppression with “watchdog” module type in seconds Duration of the alarm delay with “watchdog” module type in seconds 1: Watchdog 9: Window 2: One-door solution 10: Universal 3: Two-door solution 11: RWS + KL400 4: Four-door solution 12: DCU 1, … or … 5: IQ Lock EL + AUT 13: DCU … revolving door 6: IQ Lock 72 + AUT (from software 14: DCU 1, … or … + RWS + KL400 version 2) 15: MBZ300 smoke and heat extraction 7: Automatic stat. system 8: Automatic 4Sec 0: Level 0. No protocol is written in the log file 1: Level 1. Alarm messages are written in the log file 2: Level 2. Alarm messages and actions are written in the log file 0: as “ZSU master group 1” not active 1: as “ZSU master group 1” active Day configuration “ZSU master group 1” 0: as “ZSU master group 1” inactive on this day of the week 1: as “ZSU master group 1” active on this day of the week Start time “ZSU master group 1” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 End time “ZSU master group 1” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 0: as “ZSU master group 2” not active. 1: as “ZSU master group 2” active. Day configuration “ZSU master group 2”. 0: as “ZSU master group 2” inactive on this day of the week 1: as “ZSU master group 2” active on this day of the week Start time “ZSU master group 2” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 End time “ZSU master group 2” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 0: as “ZSU master group 3” not active. 1: as “ZSU master group 3” active. Day configuration “ZSU master group 3”. 0: as “ZSU master group 3” inactive on this day of the week 1: as “ZSU master group 3” active on this day of the week Start time “ZSU master group 3” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 End time “ZSU master group 3” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 11  GEZE IO 420 70.ZSUMASTER4_ACTIVITY(0/1) = 0; 71.ZSUMASTER4_SUNDAY(0/1) 72.ZSUMASTER4_MONDAY(0/1) 73.ZSUMASTER4_TUESDAY(0/1) 74.ZSUMASTER4_WEDNESDAY(0/1) 75.ZSUMASTER4_THURSDAY(0/1) 76.ZSUMASTER4_FRIDAY(0/1) 77.ZSUMASTER4_SATURDAY(0/1) 78.ZSUMASTER4_START_HH(0~23) 79.ZSUMASTER4_START_MM(0~59) 80.ZSUMASTER4_END_HH(0~23) 81.ZSUMASTER4_END_MM(0~59) 82.ZSUMASTER5_ACTIVITY(0/1) = = = = = = = = = = = = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 83.ZSUMASTER5_SUNDAY(0/1) 84.ZSUMASTER5_MONDAY(0/1) 85.ZSUMASTER5_TUESDAY(0/1) 86.ZSUMASTER5_WEDNESDAY(0/1) 87.ZSUMASTER5_THURSDAY(0/1) 88.ZSUMASTER5_FRIDAY(0/1) 89.ZSUMASTER5_SATURDAY(0/1) 90.ZSUMASTER5_START_HH(0~23) 91.ZSUMASTER5_START_MM(0~59) 92.ZSUMASTER5_END_HH(0~23) 93.ZSUMASTER5_END_MM(0~59) 94.DOOR1_SLAVEZSU_GR1(0/1) 95.DOOR1_SLAVEZSU_GR2(0/1) 96.DOOR1_SLAVEZSU_GR3(0/1) 97.DOOR1_SLAVEZSU_GR4(0/1) 98.DOOR1_SLAVEZSU_GR5(0/1) = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 99.DOOR1_SLAVEZSU_ABORT(0/1) = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 100.DOOR2_SLAVEZSU_GR1(0/1) 101.DOOR2_SLAVEZSU_GR2(0/1) 102.DOOR2_SLAVEZSU_GR3(0/1) 103.DOOR2_SLAVEZSU_GR4(0/1) 104.DOOR2_SLAVEZSU_GR5(0/1) 105.DOOR2_SLAVEZSU_ABORT(0/1) = = = = = = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 106.DOOR3_SLAVEZSU_GR1(0/1) 107.DOOR3_SLAVEZSU_GR2(0/1) 108.DOOR3_SLAVEZSU_GR3(0/1) 109.DOOR3_SLAVEZSU_GR4(0/1) 110.DOOR3_SLAVEZSU_GR5(0/1) 111.DOOR3_SLAVEZSU_ABORT(0/1) = = = = = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; = 0; 112.DOOR4_SLAVEZSU_GR1(0/1) 113.DOOR4_SLAVEZSU_GR2(0/1) 114.DOOR4_SLAVEZSU_GR3(0/1) 115.DOOR4_SLAVEZSU_GR4(0/1) 116.DOOR4_SLAVEZSU_GR5(0/1) 117.DOOR4_SLAVEZSU_ABORT(0/1) = = = = = = 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 0; 118.TYPE OF CP(0~3) = 0; END OF FILE … 12 0: as “ZSU master group 4” not active. 1: as “ZSU master group 4” active. Day configuration “ZSU master group 4” 0: as “ZSU master group 4” inactive on this day of the week 1: as “ZSU master group 4” active on this day of the week Start time “ZSU master group 4” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 End time “ZSU master group 4” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 0: as “ZSU master group 5” not active. 1: as “ZSU master group 5” active. Day configuration “ZSU master group 5” 0: as “ZSU master group 5” inactive on this day of the week 1: as “ZSU master group 5” active on this day of the week Start time “ZSU master group 5” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 End time “ZSU master group 5” Specification of “hours” 0-23; specification of “minutes” 0-59 Slave assignment of door #1 to “ZSU master group” … to … 0: Door #1 is not part of this ZSU group 1: Door #1 is part of this ZSU group 0: Time switch function for door #1 not interruptible 1: Time switch function for door #1 interruptible Slave assignment of door #2 to “ZSU master group” … to … 0: Door #1 is not part of this ZSU group 1: Door #1 is part of this ZSU group 0: Time switch function for door #2 not interruptible 1: Time switch function for door #2 interruptible Slave assignment of door #3 to “ZSU master group” … to … 0: Door #3 is not part of this ZSU group 1: Door #3 is part of this ZSU group 0: Time switch function for door #3 not interruptible 1: Time switch function for door #3 interruptible Slave assignment of door #4 to “ZSU master group” … to … 0: Door #4 is not part of this ZSU group 1: Door #4 is part of this ZSU group 0: Time switch function for door #4 not interruptible 1: Time switch function for door #4 interruptible 0: no CP 3: Pin “+24V” and “DET” of the connection “CP” are short-circuited together. 1: one CP “CP” are short-circuited together. 2: two CPs GEZE IO 420 …  Module description The IO 420 offers 10 module types. The respective inputs/outputs are used in different ways depending on the module type. … Module type “watchdog” The “watchdog” module type can be used for monitoring a door. When the monitoring function is armed, the door may only be opened by release. In all other cases, an alarm message is sent after the alarm suppression and alarm delay times have expired. When the monitoring function is not armed, the door can be opened without release. Connections Input … Output … 3 … 1 … 3 … Assignment/function description à rising flank - monitoring is disarmed à falling flank - monitoring is armed Menu Duration for short-term release Release with short-term release function; only with rising flank Bolt feedback Door contact Monitoring state; enabled with armed monitoring Electric strike fail safe Alarm suppressed: … sec cycle Alarm delayed: on Alarm enabled: off Alarm suppressed: off Alarm delayed: off Alarm enabled: Permanently on Tab. 1: Pin assignment for “watchdog” module type Functional description of the inputs and outputs current state – current state Monitoring disarmed Monitoring armed Alarm suppressed (output … enabled and output … flashing every few seconds) State changes to Alarm active Monitoring armed Alarm active Monitoring disarmed Alarm suppressed Alarm active Monitoring disarmed Monitoring armed Alarm delayed Alarm delayed (output … and … enabled.) Alarm enabled (output … and … enabled.) Alarm active Monitoring armed (if the alarm activation has been cancelled and a command sent either via input 2, CAN or BACnet as acknowledgement to the IO 420.) Monitoring armed (if the alarm activation has been cancelled and a command sent either via input 2, CAN or BACnet as acknowledgement to the IO 420.) State changes with Sabotage à falling flank at input … à CAN command “watchdog enable” à BACnet command “watchdog enable” Sabotage à rising flank at input … à CAN command “watchdog disable” à BACnet command “watchdog disable” If the door is locked but open Sabotage à rising flank at input … à CAN command “watchdog disable” à BACnet command “watchdog disable” If the alarm activation has been cancelled and the alarm acknowledged. If the alarm suppression time has expired. à Sabotage à If the alarm delay time has expired. à Short-term release through input … à CAN command “watchdog enable”, “watchdog disable” or “KZF” à BACnet command “KZF” à Short-term release through input … à CAN command “watchdog enable”, “watchdog disable” or “KZF” à BACnet command “KZF” 13  … GEZE IO 420 Module type “1 door” The “1 door” module type can be used for controlling one door. The connection of release switch, short-term release push button, reed contact and lock feedback is possible. The messages are forwarded via bus. Anschlüsse Input Output … 2 … 4 … 2 … 4 Belegung/ Funktionsbeschreibung à rising flank - unlock à falling flank - lock Short-term release is triggered with rising flank Bolt feedback Door contact Electric strike fail safe Electric strike fail secure Can be configured à inactive à Sabotage alarm à closed à Locked à closed and locked à inactive à Sabotage alarm à closed à Locked à closed and locked Can be configured Tab. 2-pin assignment module type “1-door” current state – current state State changes to unlocked locked In this state output … is enabled and output if time switch is not enabled. … is disabled. Output … and … are enabled or disabled depending on the configuration. time switch (ZSU) locked unlocked In this state output … is enabled and output … is disabled. Output … and … are enabled or disabled short-term release (KZF) depending on the configuration. time switch (ZSU) short-term release (KZF) locked In this state output … is enabled and output … disabled. Output … and … are enabled or disabled depending on the configuration. KZF time unlocked can be extended by input … if “KZF retriggering” is enabled. time switch (ZSU) locked In this state output … is enabled and output with enabled option time switch inter2 disabled. Output … and … are enabled or ruption disabled depending on the configuration. locked without enabled option time switch interruption State changes with à falling flank from input … à CAN command “lock” à BACnet command “lock” à sabotage If ZSU is active and one of the above-mentioned release devices occurs. à rising flank from input … à CAN command “unlock” à BACnet command “unlock” à rising flank from input … à CAN command “short-term release” à BACnet command “short-term release” If ZSU message is enabled and ZSU was not interrupted. If KZF time has expired If KZF interruptible is enabled and the door is closed again after opening. KZF is enabled for at least … seconds à rising flank from input … à CAN command “unlock” à BACnet command “unlock” à falling flank from input … à CAN command “lock”. à BACnet command “lock” à sabotage à If time switch message is no longer enabled. Time switch interruption If “time switch interruptible” is enabled in the IO 420 configuration, the “time switch” state can be interrupted using the “lock” command. The state then changes to “locked” and the flag “time switch aborted” is set. No further change in state can take place when the flag is set. The flag is reset again when the door is unlocked and locked. The message “time switch” has to be enabled. 14 GEZE IO 420 …  Module type “2 doors” The “2 doors” module type can be used for controlling two mutually independent doors. The connection of door contacts and lock feedback to the inputs is possible. The connection of a release switch is not designated for this module type. Connections Input Output … 2 … 4 … 2 … 4 Assignment/function description Lock feedback door #1 Door contact door #1 Lock feedback door #2 Door contact door #2 Electric strike fail safe door #1 Electric strike fail safe door #2 Can be configured for door #1 Can be configured for door #2 à Inactive à Sabotage alarm à closed à Locked à closed and locked à Inactive à Sabotage alarm à closed à Locked à closed and locked Tab. 3: Pin assignment module type “2-doors” current state – current state unlocked In this state output … or … is enabled. Output … and … are enabled or disabled depending on the configuration. locked In this state output … or … is disabled. Output … and … are enabled or disabled depending on the configuration. short-term release (KZF) In this state output … or … is enabled. Output … and … are enabled or disabled depending on the configuration. KZF retriggering is not possible in this mode. time switch (ZSU) In this state output … or … is enabled. Output … and … are enabled or disabled depending on the configuration. State changes to locked if time switch is not enabled. State changes with à CAN command “lock” à BACnet command “lock” à sabotage time switch (ZSU) If ZSU is active and one of the above-mentioned release devices occurs. unlocked à CAN command “unlock” à BACnet command “unlock” short-term release (KZF) à CAN command “short-term release” à BACnet command “short-term release” time switch (ZSU) If ZSU message is enabled and if ZSU was not interrupted. locked à if KZF time has expired à if KZF interruptible is enabled and the door is closed again after opening. The min. KZF time is … seconds. unlocked à CAN command “unlock” à BACnet command “unlock” locked à CAN command “lock”. with enabled option time switch interrup- à BACnet command “lock” tion locked à sabotage without enabled option time switch à If time switch message is no longer interruption enabled. 15  GEZE IO 420 … .1 GEZE IO 420 Module type “4 doors” LEDs The “4 doors” module type can be used for controlling four mutually independent doors. Only the connection of door inputs possible. The connection a lock feedback or a release switch is not designated LED 1contacts - (rot) to the LED blinkt,iswenn microSD-Card gelesenofoder geschrieben wird. for this module type. LED … - (gelb) LED … - (rot) Connections LED … - (grün) Input … LED … - (grün) … LED … - (gelb) … LED in - (grün) LED out - (rot)4 … Electric strike fail safe door #1 … Electric strike fail safe door #2 Schnittstellen / GEZE IO 420 … Electric strike fail safe door #3 Schnittstellen … àElectric strike fail safeverwendet door #4 CAN: 50 kBit/s, für TE 200, VAT 220, TZ 320. à ST 220: verwendet für ST 220, IQ-Aut Standflügel. Tab. 4: Pin assignment module type “4-doors” à GEZE-Bus: verwendet für IQ-Aut Gangflügel. à BACnet: verwendet für BACnet MS/TP-Schnittstelle. Output … .2 … .3 … .4 … LED leuchtet, wenn „CP“ (Kondensatorplatine) angeschlossen ist. LED blinkt bei Störung. Assignment/function description LED blinkt im normalen Betrieb. Door contact door #1 LED leuchtet, wenn Spannungsversorgung für Microcontroller aktiv ist. Door contact door #2 LED blinkt, wenn Daten über BACnet ausgetauscht werden. Door contact door #3 LED-in 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Eingang “in” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. Door contact door #4 LED-out 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Ausgang “out” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. current state – current state unlocked In this state output 1, 2, … or … is enabled. DIP-Schalter Konfiguration State changes to locked if time switch is not enabled. State changes with à CAN command “lock” à BACnet command “lock” à sabotage CAN: Abschlusswiderstand „CAN“ 120 Ohm time switch (ZSU) If ZSU is active and one of the above-menrelease devices occurs. X DIP-Schalter am Anfang und Ende des CAN-BUS auf ONtioned setzen. locked à CAN command “unlock” BACnet: Abschlusswiderstandunlocked „BACnet“ 120 Ohm In this state output 1,X 2, … or … is disabled. BACnetMS/TP command BACnet DIP-Schalter am ersten und am letzen IO 420 desàBACnet Bus“unlock” auf ON setzen. short-term release (KZF) à CAN command “short-term release” GEZE-Bus: DIP-Schalter Abschlusswiderstand „GEZE-Bus“ 120 Ohm à BACnet command “short-term release” X Bei Anschluss von GEZE-Motorschloss oder TZ 320 (Anschluss für KL 220), DIP-Schalter auf time switch (ZSU) If ZSU message is enabled and if ZSU was ON setzen. not interrupted. Network-Bias: DIP-Schalter „Network-Bias“ short-term release (KZF) locked if KZF time has expired Network-Bias für BACnet MS/TP zu aktivieren, DIP-Schalter auf ON setzen. In this state output 1,X 2, 3Um or 4den is enabled. if KZF interruptible is enabled and the door In einem MS/TP Netwerksystem darf nur ein Bias aktiviert sein. after opening. The min. KZF KZF re-triggering is not possible in BACnet this is closed again mode. time is … seconds. unlocked à CAN command “unlock” microSD à BACnet command “unlock” time switch (ZSU) locked à CAN command “lock”. microSD-Card wird im option FAT16/32-Fileformat geschrieben und command gelesen. Andere In this state output 1,Die 2, … microSD-Card or … is enabled. (SDHC) with enabled time switch interrupà BACnet “lock” Formate werden nicht unterstützt. tion Die Dateien des IO 420 können auf eine microSD-Card kopiert werden. Hierfür wird das ST 220 benötigt. Gegebenenfalls können die Daten am PC weiter angepasst werden locked à sabotage (Parametrierung oderwithout Änderung der BACnet-Namen). mittels microSD-Card enabled option time switchDas Profilà kann If timedann switch message is no longer auf interruption enabled. ein anderes IO 420 mit gleicher Firmware geladen werden. Folgende Dateien werden auf der Karte erstellt: Module type à“automatic / “automatic … sec” Namensdatei stat” für BACnet-Namen: „IO420_V1.BAC“; à Konfigurationsdatei: „IO420_V1.CON“; Parameter des IO 420. can be connected With this module type, the IO 420 can control a GEZE doorbeinhaltet drive via alle inputs/outputs. Switches à Log-Datei: „IO420_00.LOG“ bis „IO420_39.LOG“; at input … and … for this. Input … and … are used to evaluate the door feedback. Je nach Einstellung werden Alarmmeldungen und Aktionen in die Log-Datei geschrieben. WithWenn this module no fault messages thedie drive can be evaluated viadem the IO 420, since the drive communicates die LEDtype, für microSD-Card blinkt,of darf microSD-Card nicht aus Slot herausgenommen werden. via the inputs/outputs than via Zum Entfernen undrather Einstecken derRS485. microSD-Card das IO 420 spannungslos schalten. … .5 Connections Reset Input … Reset-Taster … Output … 4 … 2 … 4 Assignment/function description à rising flank: change of state to “automatic” à falling flank: change of state to “night” Mit dem Reset-Taster kann die Werkseinstellung wiederhergestellt werden. àReset risingdurchführen flank: change of state to “permanently open” àXfalling flank: no effect Gerät spannungslos schalten. Lock state X „Reset-Button“ auf der Platine gedrückt halten. Door contact X Spannungsversorgung einschalten. Nach to … Sekunden Command DCU “night”wird das Gerät auf Werkseinstellung versetzt. LED 3to „Störung“ LED … „Normalbetrieb“ blinken im 0,4 Sekunden-Takt gleichzeitig. Command DCU “shopund closed” X Wenn die LEDs blinken „Reset-Button“ loslassen. Command to DCU “automatic” X Um das Gerät in den Betriebsmodus zurückzusetzen, Spannungsversorgung aus- und wieder Command to DCU “permanently open” einschalten. Tab. 5: Pin assignment of module type “automatic” 16 … GEZE IO 420 State automatic Output … is enabled. If module type “automatic … sec” is enabled, output … is switched off again after … seconds.  State changes to night shop closed permanently open shop closed (exit only) Output … is enabled. If module type “automatic … sec” is enabled, output … is switched off again after … seconds. night automatic permanently open permanently open: Output … is enabled. If module type “automatic … sec” is enabled, output … is switched off again after … seconds. night shop closed automatic night Output … is enabled. If module type “automatic … sec” is enabled, output … is switched off again after … seconds. automatic shop closed permanently open State changes with à falling flank input … à CAN command “night” à BACnet command “night” à CAN command “close shop” à BACnet command “close shop” à of the rising flank input … à CAN command “permanent open” à BACnet command “permanent open” à of the falling flank input … à CAN command “night” à BACnet command “night” à of the rising flank input … à CAN command “automatic” à BACnet command “automatic” à of the rising flank input … à CAN command “permanent open” à BACnet command “permanent open” à of the falling flank input … à CAN command “night” à BACnet command “night” à CAN command “close shop” à BACnet command “close shop” à of the rising flank input … à CAN command “automatic” à BACnet command “automatic” à of the rising flank input … à CAN command “automatic” à BACnet command “automatic” à CAN command “close shop” à BACnet command “close shop” à of the rising flank input … à CAN command “permanent open” à BACnet command “permanent open” 17 zu beachten, dass die Zeile mit einem Semikolon „;“ endet und der Name nicht mehr als 32 Zeichen enthält. Die Verwendung von Sonderzeichen ist nicht erlaubt, ausgenommen Leerzeichen, Unterstrich, Bindestrich, Punkt und Komma.  … GEZE IO 420 Parametrierung GEZE IO 420 Die erste Parametrierung des IO 420 sollte grundsätzlich mit Hilfe des GEZE Serviceterminals ST 220 erfolgen. EinModule type “window” mal eingestellt kann die Konfigurationsdatei „IO420_V1.CON“ auf eine microSD-Card kopiert und gegebenenfalls With this module type, the IO 420 can control two windows via inputs/outputs. Switches can be connected at am PC weiter angepasst werden. Das so erstellte Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf ein anderes IO 420 input … and … for this. Control is by means of collective commands i.e. the windows are triggered together. mit gleicher Firmware geladen werden. WithWenn this module no fault messages of the can be evaluated, the herausgenommen drive communicates via the indie LED type, für microSD-Card blinkt, darf diedrive microSD-Card nicht aus since dem Slot werden. puts/outputs ratherund thanEinstecken via RS485.der microSD-Card das IO 420 spannungslos schalten. Zum Entfernen Bei der Modifizierung der Konfigurationsdatei Connections Assignment/function descriptionam PC sind folgende Punkte zu beachten: àInput Der Parametername einschließlich dem „=“ Zeichen darf nicht geändert werden. Das „=“ fungiert hier als Collective command “open windows” with rising flank. The falling flank has no function … Trennzeichen zwischen Titelteil und Wert. Collective command “close windows” with rising flank. The falling flank has no function … à Der Parameter-Wert darf nur Zahlen enthalten. Collective command “stop windows”. Whether a stop is triggered by falling or rising flank can be configured. … à Die in den Klammern Angegebenen min./max. Werte beachten. Feedback “closed” for window … and 2. The contacts should be closed in series. … Output Relais_open_win1. This relay is enabled if window … is to be opened. … Parametername Wert Beschreibung Relais_close_win1. This relay is enabled if window … is to be closed. … 0.CAN_ADDR1(0~63) = 1; CAN-Adresse für Tür #1 Relais_open_win2. This relay is enabled if window … is to be opened. … 1.CAN_ADDR2(0~63) = 0; CAN-Adresse für Tür #2 Relais_close_win2.=This0;relay isCAN-Adresse enabled if window … 2.CAN_ADDR3(0~63) für Tür 2#3is to be closed. 3.CAN_ADDR4(0~63) = 0; CAN-Adresse für Tür #4 Tab. 6: Pin assignment of module type 4.BACNET_MACADR(0~127) = “window” 1; BACnet MAC-Adresse … 18 5.BACNET_DEVICEID(1~4194303) 6.BACNET_BAUDRATE(0~6) current state – current state = = 1; 5; stop 7.BACNET_NOTIFYCLASS(1~90) all outputs are disabled. 8.VALUE_UTC_OFFSET(0~780) 9.SIGN_UTC_OFFSET(1:-/0:+) = = = 50; 60; 1; closing 10.CONF_OUTPUT3(0~4) Output … or … is enabled. 11.CONF_OUTPUT4(0~4) = = 0; 0; 12.INPUT1_TYPE(0~10) 13.INPUT2_TYPE(0~10) 14.INPUT3_TYPE(0~12) opening 15.INPUT4_TYPE(0~12) Output … or … is enabled. = = = = 10; 10; 10; 10; 16.KZF1_ABORT(0/1) = 0; 17.KZF1_AFTERTRG(0/1) = 0; 18.KZF1_TIME(3~30) 19.KZF2_ABORT(0/1) = = 10; 0; BACnet DEVICE -ID … State = nicht aktiv to 2= 19,2 kB 4= 57,6 kBchanges with 6= 115,2 kB changes State 1= 9,6 kB 3= 38,4 kB 5= 76,8 kB opening à rising flank from input … Instanznummer des Notification class object. à BACnet command “open window” UTC-Zeit offset in Minuten; Betragswert ohne Vorzeichen; (z. B. DE“open = 60 Min.) à CAN command window” Vorzeichen closing für UTC-Offset. à rising flank from input … 1 : negativer Offset à BACnet command “close window” 0: positiver Offset à CAN command “close window” Offset = [UTC] - [local time], daher hat Deutschland einen negativen Wert. opening à rising flank from input … Konfiguration von Ausgang … und … bei Türlösung à BACnet command “open window” à CAN command “open window” 0: Ausgang inaktiv 3: Geschlossen 1:stop Alarm 4: Verriegelt und Geschlossen. à rising flank from input … 2: Verriegelt à if the time of 90 sec has expired. à BACnet “stop”anders. Der gültige Wertbereich für den jeweiligen Eingang ist je command nach Modultyp CAN command “stop” der Die folgende Liste dient zu Entschlüsselung derà Nummern. Die Änderung Eingänge 220 erfolgen. closing muss über das GEZE Serviceterminal àSTrising flank from input … à BACnet command “close window” 0: inaktiv 7: Standflügel geschlossen à CAN command “close window” 1: Gangflügel entriegelt 8: KZF-GF (Befehl) 2:stop Gangflügel-entriegeln (Befehl) 9: ZSU-Master à rising flank from input … 3: KZF-GF und SF (Befehle) 10: Schalter-Funktion à if the time of 90 sec has expired. 4: Gangflügel geschlossen 11: BMA für Universalmodul (Schließer) à BACnet command “stop” 5: BMA (Öffner) 12: RWA für Universalmodul (Schließer) à CAN command “stop” 6: RWA (Öffner) 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 ist nicht unterbrechbar 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 ist unterbrechbar 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 kann nicht nachgetriggert werden 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #1 kann nachgetriggert werden Kurzzeitfreigabezeit Tür #1 (3 bis 30 Sekunden) 0: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #2 ist nicht unterbrechbar 1: Kurzzeitfreigabe Tür #2 ist unterbrechbar GEZE IO 420 …  Module type “universal” With this module type, the IO 420 has universal control via inputs/outputs. Switches can be connected at input … and … for this. The inputs can be configured as ZSU masters and the ZSU master can be activation via the respective switch or internal timer. In addition, inputs … and … can be configured for RWA or BMA. Connections Input … 2 … 4 Output … 2 … 4 Assignment/function description à Feedback: Signal is only detected and reported (CAN) à Switch for relay 1: Output … is switched on for rising flank, the output is switched off for falling flank. à ZSU master 1: ZSU master #1 is enabled as long as the switch is switched on. à Feedback à Switch for relay … à ZSU master … à Feedback à Switch for relay … à ZSU master … à BMA (closer) à RWA (closer) à Feedback à Switch for relay … à ZSU master … à BMA (closer) à RWA (closer) Output relay … Output relay … Output relay … Output relay … Tab. … Pin assignment module type “universal” State off The corresponding output is disabled. on The corresponding output is enabled. State changes to on time switch off if ZSU is not enabled. time switch time switch The corresponding output is enabled. off State changes with à with rising flank of the corresponding input, if this is configured as a switch. à BACnet command “on” à CAN command “on” If ZSU message is enabled and if ZSU was not interrupted. à falling flank of the corresponding input, if this is configured as a switch. à BACnet command “off” à CAN command “off” à with the above-mentioned release devices if the ZSU message is enabled. à If the ZSU message is disabled. à BACnet command “off” can trigger this change in state if ZSU is configured as “interruptible”. à CAN command “off” can trigger this change in state if ZSU is configured as “interruptible”. 19 … .4 microSD microSD-Card  … Die microSD-Card (SDHC) wird im FAT16/32-Fileformat geschrieben und gelesen. Andere Formate IO 420 werden nicht unterstützt. Die Dateien des IO 420 können auf eine microSD-Card kopiertGEZE werden. Hierfür wird das ST 220 benötigt. Gegebenenfalls können die Daten am PC weiter angepasst werden (Parametrierung Module type “IQ lock El + oder Aut”Änderung der BACnet-Namen). Das Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf ein anderes IO 420 mit gleicher Firmware geladen werden. The module type “IQFolgende Lock EL +Dateien Aut” is used to activate GEZE motor locks. werden auf der Karte erstellt: IQ Aut is connected àwith the IO 420 via bus (terminal “ST 220”) and controlled accordingly. All the states and fault Namensdatei für BACnet-Namen: „IO420_V1.BAC“; messages from the IQ can be read out and forwarded via BACnet.alle Parameter des IO 420. à Aut Konfigurationsdatei: „IO420_V1.CON“; beinhaltet IQ Lock EL is connected with the IO 420 via inputs/outputs and controlled accordingly. For this reason, the IO 420 à Log-Datei: „IO420_00.LOG“ bis „IO420_39.LOG“; can neither read out fault messages of IQ Lock EL Alarmmeldungen nor forward theseund via Aktionen BACnet. in die Log-Datei geschrieben. Je nach Einstellung werden In the case of fire protection door, capacitor power (CP) must be connected to terminal CP and theEinstecken parameter “Conf. CP” must das be set accordingly (see schalten. chapter … Service menu). Zum Entfernen und der microSD-Card IO 420 spannungslos Wenn die LED für microSD-Card blinkt, darf die microSD-Card nicht aus dem Slot herausgenommen werden. CAUTION … .5 Release Reset of the passive leaf When the passive leaf is released, the active leaf is automatically released immediately. Reset-Taster Mit dem Reset-Taster kann die Werkseinstellung wiederhergestellt werden. Hold open Reset“permanently durchführen open” is possible. With IQ Lock EL the state Gerät spannungslos schalten. With IQ Aut the doorXremains opened for the hold-open time set in the IO 420 configuration. X „Reset-Button“ auf der Platine gedrückt halten. The locking bolt is held by the switch lock as long as the door is open. X Spannungsversorgung einschalten. Connections Input … 2 … 4 Output … 2 … 4 Nach … Sekunden wird das Gerät auf Werkseinstellung versetzt. Assignment/function description LED … „Störung“ und LED … „Normalbetrieb“ blinken im 0,4 Sekunden-Takt gleichzeitig. GF_locked (feedback) X Wenn die LEDs blinken „Reset-Button“ loslassen. à Release_AL factory setting) X Um das (command, Gerät in den Betriebsmodus zurückzusetzen, Spannungsversorgung aus- und wieder à KZF_AL_IL (command), triggered with rising flank. einschalten. à KZF_AL_IL (command, factory setting), triggered with rising flank. à AL_closed (feedback) à BMA (evaluated as electric strike) à RWA (evaluated as electric strike) à BMA (factory setting, electric strike) à RWA (electric strike) à IL_closed (feedback) à KZF_AL (command), triggered with rising flank. Release for IQ Lock EL Day/night for IQ Lock EL Feedback relay active when GF is locked Feedback relay active when GF is locked Tab. 8: Pin assignment of module type “IQ lock” 20 … GEZE IO 420 … .1  Active leaf current state – current state night Outputs 1, … and … are disabled. State changes to day released short-term release (KZF) day Output … is enabled night released short-term release released Output … is enabled. night day short-term release short-term release Output … is enabled. night day released error … .2 State changes with à BACnet command “day” à CAN command “day” à rising flank of input “release” à BACnet command “release” à CAN command “release” à rising flank of input “KZF” à BACnet command “short-term release” à CAN command “short-term release” à falling flank from input “day/night”. à BACnet command “night” à CAN command “night” à rising flank of input “release” à BACnet command “release” à CAN command “release” à rising flank of input “KZF” à BACnet command “short-term release” à CAN command “short-term release” à falling flank of input “release” (the last previous state was “night”) à BACnet command “night” à CAN command “night” à BACnet command “day” à CAN command “day” à Not possible à falling flank of input “release” (the last previous state was “night”) à BACnet command “night” à CAN command “night” à BACnet command “day” à CAN command “day” à rising flank of input “release” à BACnet command “release” à CAN command “release” The error can be acknowledged with any command. Passive leaf current state – current state State changes to unlock lock (shown as “release” in VAT 220): Output … is enabled. lock unlock (shown as “night” in VAT 220): Output … is if ZSU is not enabled. disabled. into lock (shown as “day” in VAT 220): This state is an intermediate state between “unlock” and “lock”. into unlock (shown as “day” in VAT 220): This state is an intermediate state between “lock” and “unlock”. error The error can be acknowledged with (shown as “error” in VAT 220): any command. State changes with à BACnet command “lock” à CAN command “lock” à the rising flank of input “release_IL” à BACnet command “unlock” à CAN command “unlock” 21  … GEZE IO 420 Module type “RWS + KL” In the module type “RWS + KL” the IO 420 works as a gateway between the CAN bus and BACnet and translates the lifetime message of the TZ 320 into the BACnet protocol. The control commands generated are turned into CAN commands by the IO 420 and forwarded to the TZ 320. Gateway CAN BACnet à TZ 320 transmits a lifetime message every second, which is transformed into the BACnet protocol and forwarded on BACnet MS/TP level. à BACnet object multi state value … is defined for activating the TZ 320. This object comprises three commands: “short-term release”, “unlock” and “lock”. à The bus functions of the TZ 320 e.g. “collective locking”, “BMA group over BUS” etc. are currently not supported by the IO 420. The bus function “timer” is implemented and is supported. à If a ZSU master transmits a ZSU message via BACnet, the IO 420 translates this into a CAN message. à If the IO 420 is configured as a timer master, the IO 420 transmits the ZSU message both via CAN bus and BACnet. Terminal box The inputs and outputs of the IO 420 can be used as an IO extension for the TZ 320. KL 220 has … inputs and … outputs. Since the IO 420 has … inputs and … outputs, the configuration for the fifth and sixth output of the KL 220 is not evaluated. .... Gebäudemanagementsystem Building Management System ZSU - Master / … CAN & GEZE Bus / … CAN & GEZE Bus Fig. 3: Composition BACnet MS/TP and CAN for GEZE IO 420 as Gateway for TZ 320 22 GEZE IO 420  Setting in TZ 320 and IO 420 à CAN: The CAN address in TZ 320 and IO 420 must be identical for both devices to be able to communicate with one another via CAN. à CAN terminating resistor The CAN terminating resistor in TZ 320 and IO 420 must be switched on. à The terminating resistor for the GEZE bus in IO 420 must be switched on. This setting is important for the “terminal box” function. à Timer function: The TZ 320 must be configured as a “slave”. The IO 420 per segment must be configured as “master”. à The ZSU master function is supported by the IO 420 with the following module types: à 1-door solution à 2-door solution à 4-door solution à Universal Fig. 4: Connection example for the module type “RWS + KL 220” 23  GEZE IO 420 … Module type “DCU1, … and 8” “DCU1, … and 8” are type identifications of swing door and sliding door drive with DCU light (CAN interface). In this type of module, the IO 420 functions as gateway as in module type “RWS + KL”. Therefore, drives require DCU light so that the lifetime report is forwarded to IO 420 via Can. Active leaves and passive leaves can also be connected. Gateway CAN BACnet à Automatic drive transmits a lifetime message every second, which is transformed into the BACnet protocol and forwarded on BACnet MS/TP level. à BACnet object multistate value … represents the current operating mode. à BACnet object multistate value … can change the operating mode. à The inputs and outputs must be used freely as in module type “universal”. Setting in DCU à CAN: The CAN address in DCU and IO 420 must be identical for both devices to be able to communicate with one another via CAN. E.g. DCU-GF has CAN-Address … and DCU-SF has 8. Then you must set CAN addresses in IO 420: In “Buskonf.” “konf.CAN” “1.CAN-Adresse:” the CAN address must be entered for DCU-GF. In “Buskonf.” “konf.CAN” “2.CAN-Adresse:” the CAN address must be entered for DCU-SF. à CAN-terminating resistor on the first and last device must be activated. If DCU-GF DCU-SF IO 420 … Parameter Bus address Bus address Buskonf./ 1.CAN-Adr Buskonf./ 1.CAN-Adr Value … 2 … 2 Module type “DCU6” (revolving door) In this type of module, the IO 420 functions as gateway as in module type “DCU 1, … and 8”. Therefore, drives require DCU light so that the lifetime report is forwarded to IO 420 via Can. Active leaves and passive leaves can also be connected. Gateway CAN BACnet à Automatic drive transmits a lifetime message every second, which is transformed into the BACnet protocol and forwarded on BACnet MS/TP level. à BACnet object multistate value … represents the current operating mode. à BACnet object multistate value … can change the operating mode. à The inputs and outputs must be used freely as in module type “universal”. Setting in DCU à CAN: The CAN address in DCU and IO 420 must be identical for both devices to be able to communicate with one another via CAN. In “Buskonf.” “konf.CAN” “1.CAN-Adresse:” the CAN address of the revolving door drive must be entered. à CAN-terminating resistor of both devices must be activated. … Module type “DCU128+RWS+KL” à This type of module is a summary of “RSW+KL” and “DCU 1, … and 8”. TZ 320, DCU-GF and DCU-SF are connected by CAN. Terminals 45 and 46 of TZ 320 are connected to the GEZE BUS of IO 420. Thus, the inputs and outputs of IO 420 are used as terminal box for RWS. Setting in DCU à CAN address of DCU-GF and TZ320 must have the same CAN address. Precisely this address is entered in IO 420 under “Buskonf.” “Konf. CAN” “CAN-Adr[DCU GF,TZ]”. à The CAN address of DCU-SF is entered in IO 420 under “Buskonf.” “Konf. CAN” “CAN-Adr[DCU SF]”. à If DCU-GF DCU-SF TZ 320 IO 420 24 Parameter Bus address Bus address Bus address Buskonf./ 1.CAN-Adr Value … 2 … 1 Buskonf./ 2.CAN-Adr … Parameter Bus address Bus address Bus address GEZE-Bus: DIP-Schalter Abschlusswiderstand „GEZE-Bus“ 120 Ohm X Bei Anschluss von GEZE-Motorschloss oder TZ 320 (Anschluss für KL 220), DIP-Schalter auf ON setzen. GEZE IO 420 Network-Bias:  DIP-Schalter „Network-Bias“ X Um den Network-Bias für BACnet MS/TP zu aktivieren, DIP-Schalter auf ON setzen. In einem BACnet MS/TP Netwerksystem darf nur ein Bias aktiviert sein. … Module type “MBZ” … .4 à An emergency power control unit MBZ 300 is connected via CAN. microSD The following BACnet object types are used for the GEZE IO 420 MBZ: àmicroSD-Card Device object (one Die object) microSD-Card (SDHC) wird im FAT16/32-Fileformat geschrieben und gelesen. Andere Formate à Multistate valuewerden (up to 66 objects) nicht unterstützt. Die Dateien des IO 420 können auf eine microSD-Card kopiert werden. à Notification class object (one Hierfür wird dasobject) ST 220 benötigt. Gegebenenfalls können die Daten am PC weiter angepasst werden (Parametrierung oder Änderung der BACnet-Namen). Das Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf ein anderes gleicher Firmware geladen werden. The parameter setting for the IO 420 420 mit should always be done with the aid of the GEZE service terminal ST 220. Folgendefile Dateien werden auf der erstellt: Once set, the configuration “IO4220MBZ.CON” canKarte be copied to a microSD card. à Namensdatei für BACnet-Namen: „IO420_V1.BAC“; Konfigurationsdatei: des187103. IO 420. This module type isà only available for the „IO420_V1.CON“; variant of GEZE beinhaltet IO 420 withalle theParameter product ID à Log-Datei: „IO420_00.LOG“ bis „IO420_39.LOG“; With this variant all other module types are inactive and cannot be used. Je nach Einstellung werden Alarmmeldungen und Aktionen in die Log-Datei geschrieben. die LEDconfiguration für microSD-Card blinkt, darf The Wenn MBZ module is not copied todie themicroSD-Card microSD card.nicht aus dem Slot herausgenommen werden. Zum Entfernen und Einstecken der microSD-Card das IO 420 spannungslos schalten. … .5 Be sure to adhere to the following when planning and commissioning: àReset Based on the EN 12101-10 test of the MBZ 300, a common power supply for the IO 420 and MBZ is not permitted. Consequently, a separate power supply must be used for the GEZE IO 420 MBZ. àReset-Taster Installing the GEZE IO 420 MBZ in thekann MBZdie control cabinet invalidates the VdS certification Mit dem Reset-Taster Werkseinstellung wiederhergestellt werden. of the MBZ. à MBZ 300 and GEZE IO 420 MBZ components are delivered separately ex works. Reset durchführen X Gerät spannungslos schalten. X „Reset-Button“ auf der Platine gedrückt halten. Controlling the drives via BACnet X Spannungsversorgung einschalten. Commands for opening, closing or stopping the window drives can be given using the point Nach … Sekunden wird das Gerät auf Werkseinstellung versetzt. command_slot_x_DM. LED … „Störung“ und LED … „Normalbetrieb“ blinken im 0,4 Sekunden-Takt gleichzeitig. Command Ready Open Close Stop X Wenn die LEDs blinken „Reset-Button“ loslassen. Value … einschalten. … 3 … X Um das Gerät in den Betriebsmodus zurückzusetzen, Spannungsversorgung aus- und wieder Information about the state of a drive line The points state_slot_x_DM and alarm_slot_x_DM provide information about the state of the drive modules. Value … 3 … 4 … State Opening or opened Closing or completely closed Stopped Alarm (RWA tripped) Value X (alarm) State … OK 33 Configuration fault 34 CAN BUS faulty All other values (Value minus … summarises various messages in binary code) Bit … (X-1) BUS fault Bit … (X-1) Network fault Bit … (X-1) Line fault Bit … (X-1) Rechargeable battery fault Bit … (X-1) Alarm 25  GEZE IO 420 Information about the state of a fire section The points state_slot_x_CM/SM and alarm_slot_x_CM/SM provide information about the state of the control or sensor module. Value X (state CM / SM) State 1, 9, 33, 41, 65, OK 73, 97, 105 All other values GEZE IO 420Bit … (X-1) Bit … (X-1) … .1 Bit … (X-1) LEDs Bit … (X-1) Alarm Alarm button pressed Smoke detector … Smoke detector … Signal relay active LED … - (rot) LED blinkt, wenn microSD-Card gelesen oder geschrieben wird. LED … - (gelb) LED leuchtet, wenn „CP“ (Kondensatorplatine) angeschlossen ist. LED … (rot) LED blinkt bei Information about the state ofStörung. the power module LED … (grün) LED blinkt im Betrieb. provide information about the state of the drive modules. The points state_slot_x_PM andnormalen alarm_slot_x_PM LED … - (grün) LED leuchtet, wenn Spannungsversorgung für Microcontroller aktiv ist. Value LED 6X- (gelb) StateLED blinkt, wenn Daten über BACnet ausgetauscht werden. (state PM) LED in - (grün) LED-in 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Eingang “in” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. … OK LED out - (rot) LED-out 4/3/2/1 leuchtet, wenn Ausgang “out” 4/3/2/1 aktiv ist. … .2 … .3 All other values (Value minus … summarises various messages in binary code) Bit … (X-1) PM voltage, rechargeable battery, safety fuse F1 OK Schnittstellen / GEZE IOrechargeable 420 Bit … (X-1) PME1 voltage, battery, safety fuse F1 OK Bit … (X-1) PME2 voltage, rechargeable battery, safety use F1 OK Schnittstellen à CAN: 50 kBit/s, verwendet für TE 200, VAT 220, TZ 320. Bit … (X-1) Charge … à ST 220: verwendet für ST 220, IQ-Aut Standflügel. Bit … (X-1) Alarm à GEZE-Bus: verwendet für IQ-Aut Gangflügel. Bit … (X-1) Charge … à BACnet: verwendet für BACnet MS/TP-Schnittstelle. >= 65 Rechargeable battery operation Value X State DIP-Schalter Konfiguration (alarm PM) 1CAN: OK Abschlusswiderstand „CAN“ 120 Ohm X DIP-Schalter 33 Configuration fault am Anfang und Ende des CAN-BUS auf ON setzen. BACnet: 34 CANAbschlusswiderstand BUS faulty „BACnet“ 120 Ohm X minus BACnet DIP-Schalter ammessages ersten und am code) letzen IO 420 des BACnet MS/TP Bus auf ON setzen. All other values (Value … summarises various in binary Bit … (X-1) Rechargeable battery fault GEZE-Bus: DIP-Schalter Abschlusswiderstand „GEZE-Bus“ 120 Ohm X fuse Bit … (X-1) Safety defective von GEZE-Motorschloss oder TZ 320 (Anschluss für KL 220), DIP-Schalter auf Bei F2 Anschluss Bit … (X-1) Temperature sensor defective ON setzen. Bit … (X-1) System voltage defective Network-Bias: DIP-Schalter „Network-Bias“ X Um den Network-Bias für BACnet MS/TP zu aktivieren, DIP-Schalter auf ON setzen. In einem BACnet MS/TP Netwerksystem darf nur ein Bias aktiviert sein. … .4 Setting in MBZ à A CAN address must be set at MBZ 300. This address minus … is entered in IO 420 under “Buskonf.” “Konf. CAN” microSD “CAN-Adr”. (MBZ 300 = n, IO 420 MBZ = (n-1) ) microSD-Card If MBZ 300 IO 420 MBZ Die microSD-Card (SDHC) wird im FAT16/32-Fileformat geschrieben und gelesen. Andere Formate Parameter Value werden nicht unterstützt. Die Dateien des IO 420 können auf eine microSD-Card kopiert werden. Bus Hierfür address wird das ST 1220 .. 64benötigt. Gegebenenfalls können die Daten am PC weiter angepasst werden Bus (Parametrierung address … (MBZ-1) der BACnet-Namen). Das Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf oder.. 63 Änderung ein anderes IO 420 mit gleicher Firmware geladen werden. Folgende Dateien werden auf der Karte300! erstellt: à Do not use any vent groups and runtime mode in MBZ à Namensdatei BACnet-Namen: „IO420_V1.BAC“; à If IO 420 MBZ firmware has beenfür reloaded to a IO 420, the IO 420 must then be reset to factory settings (see à Konfigurationsdatei: „IO420_V1.CON“; beinhaltet alle Parameter des IO 420. chapter 7). à Log-Datei: „IO420_00.LOG“ à The current MBZ module configuration mustbis be„IO420_39.LOG“; configured under “Modulkonf.”. Je nach Einstellung werden Alarmmeldungen und Aktionen in die Log-Datei geschrieben. LED für microSD-Card blinkt, MBZ darf die microSD-Card nichtisaus dem Slot herausgenommen werden. If theWenn CAN die address is changed, the current module configuration lost. Zum Entfernen und Einstecken der microSD-Card das IO 420 spannungslos schalten. … .5 Reset Reset-Taster 26 Mit dem Reset-Taster kann die Werkseinstellung wiederhergestellt werden. Reset durchführen X Gerät spannungslos schalten. X „Reset-Button“ auf der Platine gedrückt halten. X Spannungsversorgung einschalten. GEZE IO 420 Annex … EDE lists … .1 … door-solution commandable supports COV state-textreference … 1 N Y … 1 … 2 N Y … Device_IO420 … 8 … N N notification_class_obj … 15 50 N N module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … alarm_type … 19 … 1 15 N Y … door_state … 19 … 1 … N Y … door_command … 19 … 1 … Y Y … max-present-value 50 … door-solution supports COV state-textreference … 3 … 1 … 3 N N N Y Y N … 4 … door2_close_state … 3 … N N … Device_IO420 notification_class_obj module_type alarm_type door1_state door1_command door2_state door2_command … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … 15 19 19 19 19 19 19 … 50 … 2 … 4 … 6 11 15 … 3 … 3 N N N N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y … 2 … 6 … 6 max-present-value commandable supports COV state-textreference 11 15 … 3 … 3 … 3 … 3 N N N N N N N N N Y N Y N Y N Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 notif. class commandable … 1 … min-present-value objectinst. door1_lock_state door1_close_state door2_lock_state Keyname / Objectname present-value-default object-type Optional device obj.- Inst. Mandatory 50 … door-solution door1_close_state door2_close_state door3_close_state door4_close_state Device_IO420 notification_class_obj module_type alarm_type door1_state door1_command door2_state door2_command door3_state door3_command door4_state door4_command … 2 … 4 … 50 … 2 … 4 … 6 … 8 … 10 … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … notif. class … 3 … 3 … 15 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 min-present-value … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 … 1 present-value-default objectinst. Keyname / Objectname Optional object-type Mandatory device obj.- Inst. … .3 … max-present-value … close_state min-present-value objectinst. lock_state present-value-default Keyname / Objectname object-type … .2 Optional device obj.- Inst. Mandatory notif. class …  … 4 … 4 … 2 … 6 … 6 … 6 … 6 50 27  module type automatic supports COV state-textreference N Y … 2 N Y … Device_IO420 … 8 … N N notification_class_obj … 15 50 N N module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … alarm_type … 19 … 1 15 N Y … DCU_state … 19 … 1 … N Y 51 DCU_command … 19 … 1 … Y Y 61 max-presentvalue commandable supports COV state-textreference … 1 N Y 32 … 3 … N Y … unlock_state_IL … 3 … N N 32 close_state_IL … 3 … N N … Device_IO420 … 8 … N Y notification_class_obj … 15 50 N Y module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … alarm_type … 19 … 1 15 N Y … ActiveLeaf_state … 19 … 1 … N Y 52 ActiveLeaf_command InactiveLeaf_state … 1 19 19 … 5 … 1 … 4 … Y N Y Y 62 72 InactiveLeaf_command … 19 … 1 … 2 Y Y 82 max-presentvalue 50 module type RWS objectinst. commandable supports COV state-textreference … 1 N Y … 1 … 2 N Y … Device_IO420 … 8 … N N notification_class_obj … 15 50 N N module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … alarm_type … 19 … 1 15 N Y 23 TZ320_state … 19 … 1 11 N Y 53 TZ320_command … 19 … 1 … Y Y 63 … module type universal Mandatory Optional notif. class object-type … close_state min-presentvalue device obj.- Inst. Optional lock_state Keyname / Objectname 28 notif. class objectinst. … close_state_AL min-presentvalue object-type unlock_state_AL present-value-default Keyname / Objectname device obj.- Inst. Optional Mandatory … .7 50 module type IQ lock El + Aut Mandatory … .6 … notif. class commandable … 3 max-presentvalue … 1 min-presentvalue objectinst. … close_state present-value-default object-type lock_state Keyname / Objectname … .5 Optional device obj.- Inst. Mandatory present-value-default … .4 GEZE IO 420 50 commandable supports COV state-textreference … 1 N Y 34 input2_state … 3 … N Y 34 input3_state … 3 … N N 34 input4_state … 3 … N N 34 Device_IO420 … 8 … N Y notification_class_obj … 15 50 N Y module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … alarm_type … 19 … 1 15 N Y … output1_state … 19 … 1 … N Y 44 output1_command … 19 … 1 … Y Y 54 output2_state … 19 … 1 … N Y 44 output2_command … 19 … 1 … Y Y 54 output3_state … 19 … 1 … N Y 44 output3_command … 19 … 1 … Y Y 54 output4_state … 19 … 1 … N Y 44 output4_command … 19 10 … 2 Y Y 54 max-presentvalue … 1 … 50 module type watchdog supports COV state-textreference … 1 N Y … 1 … 2 N Y … Device_IO420 … 8 … N N notification_class_obj … 15 50 N N module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … alarm_type watchdog_state watchdog_command … 1 … 19 19 19 … 3 … 1 … 1 15 … 3 N N Y Y Y Y … 56 66 max-presentvalue … notif. class commandable … close_state min-presentvalue objectinst. lock_state Keyname / Objectname present-value-default object-type Optional device obj.- Inst. Mandatory 50 module type window supports COV state-textreference … 3 … N Y … window2_close_state … 3 … N Y … Device_IO420 … 8 … N N notification_class_obj … 15 50 N N module_type … 19 … 1 11 N Y … alarm_type … 19 … 1 15 N Y … window1_state … 19 … 1 … N Y 45 window1_command … 19 … 1 … Y Y 55 window2_state … 19 … 1 … N Y 45 window2_command … 19 … 1 … Y Y 55 … 1 notif. class commandable window1_close_state min-presentvalue Keyname / Objectname objectinst. present-valuedefault Optional object-type Mandatory device obj.- Inst. … .9 … notif. class objectinst. … max-presentvalue object-type input1_state min-presentvalue Keyname / Objectname device obj.- Inst. … .8  present-valuedefault GEZE IO 420 50 29  GEZE IO 420 … .10 Module type „DCU 1,2 and 8“ supports COV state-textreference 83 … 1 N N notification_class_obj 15 50 N N module_type 19 … alarm_type 19 … operating_mode 19 … mode_command 19 … lock_state 19 … door_command 19 … door_state 19 … reduced_width 19 master_key Input2 … 2 Input3 … 3 Input4 … Device_IO420 notif-class commandable 83 N … max-presentvalue 83 N … min-presentvalue N object-instance 83 object-type N … N N N N Input1 object-name 30 optional present-valuedefault mandatory … 1 … 13 N N … 15 N N 101 14 N N 84 … 7 Y N 85 … 5 N N 86 … 4 Y N 87 … 5 N N 88 … 1 … Y N 89 19 … 1 … N N 90 output1_command 19 10 … 3 Y N 91 alarm_dcu_1 19 11 … 31 N N 92 50 alarm_dcu_2 19 12 … 31 N N 93 50 alarm_dcu_3 19 13 … 31 N N 94 50 output2_command 19 14 … 1 … 91 output3_command output4_command 19 19 15 16 … 1 … 1 … 3 91 91 … 1 … 50 GEZE IO 420  … .11 Module type „DCU 6“ commandable supports COV state-textreference 83 N 83 … 1 N N notification_class_obj 15 50 N N module_type 19 … alarm_type 19 … operating_mode 19 … mode_command 19 … lock_state 19 … door_command 19 … door_state 19 … reduced_width 19 master_key … Input2 … 2 Input3 … 3 Input4 … Device_IO420 max-presentvalue 83 N … min-presentvalue N object-instance 83 object-type N … N N N N Input1 object-name notif-class optional present-valuedefault mandatory … 1 … 13 N N … 15 N N 101 14 N N 84 … 7 Y N 85 … 5 N N 86 … 4 Y N 87 … 5 N N 88 … 1 … Y N 89 19 … 1 … N N 90 output1_command 19 10 … 3 Y N 91 alarm_dcu_1 19 11 … 31 N N 98 50 alarm_dcu_2 19 12 … 31 N N 99 50 alarm_dcu_3 19 13 … 31 N N 100 50 output2_command 19 14 … 1 … 91 output3_command output4_command 19 19 15 16 … 1 … 1 … 3 91 91 … 1 … 50 31  GEZE IO 420 … .12 Module type “DCU 128+RWS+KL” door_state_DCU_GF … 3 door_state_DCU_SF … 4 Device_IO420 … 1 notification_class_obj 15 50 module_type 19 … Alarm_TZ 19 … operating_mode_DCU 19 … mode_command 19 … lock_state_DCU 19 … door_command 19 … mode_TZ 19 reduced_width 19 maintennance … N … N … N … 1 … 1 13 N N … 15 N N … 14 N N 84 … 7 Y N 95 … 5 N N 86 … 4 Y N 87 … 1 … N N 53 … 1 … Y N 89 19 … 1 … N N 96 emergency open 19 10 … 2 Y N 97 dcu_alarm1 19 11 … 31 N N 92 50 dcu_alarm2 19 12 … 31 N N 93 50 dcu_alarm3 19 13 … 31 N N 94 50 … 1 … notif-class N max-presentvalue N N N N N N object-name min-presentvalue state-textreference … state-textreference … 3 supports COV … door_state_TZ commandable lock_state_TZ present-valuedefault object-instance optional object-type mandatory N N 50 … .13 Module type „MBZ“ (firmware IO 420 MBZ) max-presentvalue commandable supports COV … 1 128 N Y 19 … 1 N Y 19 … 1 128 N Y command_slot_3_DM 19 … 1 … Y N alarm_slot_3_DM 19 … 1 … 1 … 1 34 state_slot_2_CM/SM 34 N Y state_slot_3_DM 19 … 1 … 4 N Y Device_IO420 … notification_class_obj_ 15 50 module_type 19 … 15 alarm_slot_1_PM 19 … state_slot_1_PM 19 alarm_slot_2_CM/SM min-presentvalue … object-instance … 15 34 object-type N 15 … N N N N object-name notif-class optional present-valuedefault mandatory N N Y 50 50 50 Jeweils … Objekte beschreiben ein Drive-Modul command_slot_X_DM 19 m … 1 … N N alarm_slot_X_DM 19 m+1 … 1 34 N N state_slot_X_DM 19 m+2 … 1 … N N alarm_slot_Y_WM 19 n … 1 34 N Y state_slot_Y_WM 19 n+1 … 1 … N Y 50 50 There are different BACnet objects present depending on the number of modules in MBZ 300. 32 no command night unlocked no command contact inside not closed summer mode no master key active turn(ed) off no command night/ locked shop close/ unlocked no maintenance required. emergency emergency open inactive open active no alarm 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 95 96 97 101 short time release(d) SF-master key active SF closed contact outside SF locked shop close fire alarm smoke heat alarm Text … automatic/ unlocked GF- and SFmaster key active GF and SF closed contact authorized GF and SF locked automatic burglary alarm fire alarm active Text … sabotage alarm time switch group conflict permanently RWS/ unloopen/ unlo- cked cked unknown unknown permanently RWS open permanently time switch open active Text … maintenance maintenance maintenance due GF due SF due GF and SF turn(ed) on GF-master key active winter mode GF closed GF locked night shop closed automatic 84 active inactive 83 Text … Text … or Text … or Inactive-Text Active-Text # Reference Number burgalry group conflict turn off/ unlocked operating mode off DCU not initialized Text … Text 10 BACnet disturbed heat and active sluice smoke alarm Text … fire alarm group can/power conflict supply disturbed DCU disturbed Text … Text 12 power-off Text 13 DCU not present Text 14 Text 15 maintenance maintenance maintenance DCU Type/ RTC disturdue GF due SF due GF and GF-SF incon- bed-TZ SF sistent passive sluice sluice busy Text 11 GEZE IO 420  33 34 63_wrong software ver. 1_Door radius 32_Motor ther- 33_Motor mal sensor hot unknown error Text16 16_Err.locking- 17_Err. 18_Bolt 19_SIS-SF GF unlocking-GF signal not defective correct 47_Tempsens 48_Excess no alarm 50_Fault/ (control) fault.- temperatureDCU1-T30 GF GF(180deg) expansion 78_Excess 79_Motor temperature-SF relay-SF 16_Bolt … unknown error unknown error 94 98 99 100 # Reference Number 92 93 94 98 99 100 34_TPS comm. err. 35_Pharmachy/ Permanent act.PE1 unknown error 48_KOM FREQ 17_Bolt … Text17 unknown error unknown error 36_Control 37_Freq.con- 38_Freq. does not cool verter hot converter down overloaded unknown error unknown error Text19 Text21 20_Post safety unknown error 21_Draw-in safety unknown error 51_ 52_CAN err. brake/24V-SF failure 20_Door(GF) 21_Door(SF) missing missing Text20 82_24V external 83_Rechargeable battery 50_Activati- 51_Software 52_Kat3 on … uR2 redundancy 80_Mains 81_24V power internal failure 49_Activation … 18_Bolt … 19_Bolt … contact contact unknown unknown error error Text18 08_Smoke alarm Text … unknown error Text … 71_Motor short-SF Text23 70_Target speed not reached. 39_Freq. converter 10_Encoder err.-GF Text 10 Text24 71_Excess voltage switch-off unknown error unknown error unknown error unknown error unknown error 23_Emer24_Nightgency stop time close unknown error 84_KOM DCU1 unknown error unknown error 22_Break Out unknown error 53_Manual 54_DPS unlocked/230V comm. err. failure 73_Per74_Encoder manant err.-SF actuation-SF unknown error 12_Motor fault-GF Text 12 Text26 unknown error Text27 74_Disc brake does not hold Text28 75_Disc brake switch-off 44_EEPROM S unknown error 75_Drive too hot(98 deg)-SF 44_Stop is active 13_SIS-GF detective Text 13 unknown error 57_Smoke alarm-SF unknown error unknown error unknown error unknown error 56_Perma- 57_Perma58_Perma59_Pernent actuati- nent actuati- nent actuati- manent on ANS … on ANS … on ANS … actuation ANS … 87_Sabotage unknown error 46_Tempsens (motor) fault.-GF 60_Err. in control unit-GF 29_SIO-SF detective Text29 unknown error 45_KOM PC 1-2 unknown error 61_Battery flat. unknown error Text30 77_Motor brake 46_KOM TPS 15_locked 76_T77_TSens(motor) Sens(control) fault.-SF fault-SF 45_Drive is too hot-GF no error no error no error no error Text31 91_Production test SK unknown error no error 60_Perma- 61_Permano error nent actuati- nent actuation VPS … on VPS … unknown error 90_control 91_no unknown unit defec- impluse from error tive. encoder unknown error Text 15 14_MPS dis- 15_DPS disconnected connected Text 14 25_Post safe- 26_Draw-in 27_Break Out 28_Emer- 29_Nightty active safety active active gency stop time closer active active unknown error unknown error 25_Obstacle 26_Zero 27_SIO1/SIO2 28_Motor while opeposition err. active relay-GF ning Text25 unknown error unknown error 10_Mainte- 11_Too much unknown nance brake friction error 72_Motor fault-SF 42_Emergency lock active 11_Motor short-GF Text 11 40_CRC PC … 41_CRC PC … unknown error 8_Mainte- 9_Mainnance time tenance revolutions 70_Err. in control unit-SF 22_Mechanical 23_Mecha- unknown fault GF nical fault error SF Text22 unknown 66_Rotary 67_Rotary 68_Rotary 69_Rotary error encoder encoder uR1 encoder uR2 encoder INIT short-circuit 34_Motor 35_Control does hot not cool down 07_Fire alarm Text … 37_Perma38_Permanent 39_Perma- 40_Perma41_Testing nent actuati- actuation KI2/ nent actua- nent actuati- SIO-GF on KI1 PE3 tion KA on KB unknown error Text … 67_Err. unknown unlocking-SF error 36_Internal redundancy fault/ unknown error Text … 2_Number of unknown 4_Position is unknown leaves error unknown error 64_Opening 65_ 66_Err. timeout Comm.Err locking-SF GF- SF 33_Interlocking door system err. 03_230V unknown failure error 32_Sabotage 02_12V failure 93 Text … 01_24V failure Text … 92 Text … or Active-Text Text … or Inactive-Text # Reference Number  GEZE IO 420 watchdog no alarm unlocked open unlock unlock no alarm locked inactive off stopped automatic night unlock off stop watchdog enabled automatic night no command unlock enable watchdog unlock unlock … 2 … 4 … 6 23 32 34 44 45 51 52 53 54 55 56 61 62 63 66 72 82 lock lock disable watchdog day night watchdog disabled open on time switch active day night opening on active unlocked emergency open-TZ lock lock closed locked fire alarm 1_door Text … or Text … or Inactive-Text Active-Text 4_doors Text … window error door alarmTZ time switch active short time release short time release permanently open alarm supressed lock short time released into unlock into lock short time released lock release shop close short time released close pre-lock released IQ lock error alarm delayed burglar-lock IQ lock error alarm active short time released sabotage-TZ emergency open-TT Text … service mode alarm active BACnet disturbed universal Text 10 DCU_128 Text 12 DCU_6_revolving_ door Text 13 relay fault-TZ exit opener fault-TZ IQ lock 72 error DCU_128_ RWS_KL Text 14 Comm. KL disturbed Comm. TT disturbed IQ lock El error IQ Aut active IQ Aut leaf error inactive leaf error rws_kl400 Text 11 active sluice passive sluice sluice busy emergency can disturopen-BUS bed fire alarm group can/power conflict supply disturbed automatic_4sec windows Text … sabotage-TT sabotage-KL burglary group conflict time switch group conflict sabotage alarm Text … iq_lock_bus automatic_stat Text … iq_lock_el Text … shop closed permanently DCU error opened closing time switch active hazard alarm-TZ short time release short time released smoke heat burglary alarm alarm 2_doors Text … RTC disturbed-TZ Watchdog Text 15 … Ref. Nr GEZE IO 420  State Text 35  … GEZE IO 420 Servicemenü Level … Level … Select a module Module type Module con- 1-door solution figuration (factory setting) Level … Level … Conf. output … Conf. output … Conf. door … Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … KZF 1duration KZF 1abort KZF 1re-trigger ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … Conf. ZSU interruption 2-door solution Conf. output … Conf. output … Conf. door … Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. door … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. ZSU interruption 36 KZF 1duration KZF 1abort ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … KZF 2duration KZF 2abort ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … Value range watchdog 1-door solution 2-door solution 4-door solution IQ lock EL + AUT Automatic stat Automatic … sec Window Universal RWS + KL400 DCU 1,2 and … DCU … DCU 128+RWS+KL disable Alarm Door1 locked Door1 closed Door1 closed & locked disable Alarm Door1 locked Door1 closed Door1 closed & locked 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Factory setting 1-door solution disable disable 10 No No No No No No No No disable Alarm Door1 locked Door1 closed Door1 closed & locked disable Alarm Door1 locked Door1 closed Door1 closed & locked 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no disable 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no 10 No No No No No No no disable 10 No No No No No No no GEZE IO 420  4-door solution Conf. door … Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. door … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. door … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. door … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. KZF … Conf. ZSU slave … IQ lock EL + Aut Conf. ZSU interruption Conf, inputs KZF 1duration KZF 1abort ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no 10 No No No No No No No KZF 2duration KZF 2abort ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no 10 No No No No No No No KZF 3duration KZF 3abort ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no 10 No No No No No No No KZF 4duration KZF 4abort ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … 3~90 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no 10 No No No No No No No Input … AL unlocked Input … Release AL Release AL KZF AL and IL KZF AL and IL KZF AL and IL AL closed BMA Smoke and heat extraction system BMA BMA Smoke and heat extraction system IL closed KZF-AL (command) IQ AUT IQ AUT No motor lock 3~90 10 Yes/no No No CP No CP One CP Two CPs DET short-circuited Input … Input … Conf. passive leaf Conf. KZF … Conf. CP KZF1 duration KZF1 abort Automatic stat Automatic … sec Window 37  GEZE IO 420 Universal Conf. relay … Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. relay … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. relay … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. ZSU slave … Conf. relay … Conf. ZSU interruption Conf. ZSU slave … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no No No No No No No ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no No No No No No No ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no No No No No No No ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … ZSU slave size … Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no No No No No No No Input … Input … Input … Switch/ZSU master switch Switch/ZSU master switch Switch/BMA/RWA/ switch ZSU master Switch/BMA/RWA/ switch ZSU master Conf. ZSU interruption Conf, inputs Input … RWS + KL400 BusConf. Conf.BACnet MAC-Addr. 0~100 … Device-ID 0~4194303 … Reboot BACnet enter Baud rate not enabled/ … KB/ … KB/ … KB/ … KB/ … KB/ … KB … ~ 90 Notification class Konf.CAN Conf.ZSU master ZSU master size … 50 auto. addr. assignm. 1st CAN-address: enter 1~63 … 2nd CAN-address: 1~63 … 3rd CAN-address: (with 4-door sol.) 4th CAN-address: (with 4-door sol.) Enable ZSU1 1~63 … 1~63 … Yes/no No 0~23 0~59 0~23 0~59 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no … 0 … 0 No No No No No No No ZSU1 start time ZSU1 end time ZSU1 weekday 38 … KB ZSU1 start hour ZSU1 start minute ZSU1 end hour ZSU1 end minute ZSU1 Sunday ZSU1 Monday ZSU1 Tuesday ZSU1 Wednesday ZSU1 Thursday ZSU1 Friday ZSU1 Saturday GEZE IO 420  ZSU master size … Enable ZSU2 ZSU2 start time ZSU2 end time ZSU2 Weekdays ZSU master size … ZSU3 end time ZSU3 Weekdays ZSU4 end time ZSU4 Weekdays ZSU5 end time ZSU5 Weekdays Change date Change time 0~23 0~59 0~23 0~59 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no … 0 … 0 No No No No No No No No ZSU4 start hour ZSU4 start minute ZSU4 end hour ZSU4 end minute ZSU4 Sunday ZSU4 Monday ZSU4 Tuesday ZSU4 Wednesday ZSU4 Thursday ZSU4 Friday ZSU4 Saturday 0~23 0~59 0~23 0~59 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no … 0 … 0 No No No No No No No No ZSU5 start hour ZSU5 start minute ZSU5 end hour ZSU5 end minute ZSU5 Sunday ZSU5 Monday ZSU5 Tuesday ZSU5 Wednesday ZSU5 Thursday ZSU5 Friday ZSU5 Saturday 0~23 0~59 0~23 0~59 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no … 0 … 0 No No No No No No No 10~99 1~12 1~31 0~23 0~59 0~59 Yes/no 12 … 22 11 57 … Yes German/English/ French Level … to level … German Local time Change year Change month Change day Hour Minute Second Conf. summer time Conf. language Conf. log file System info Factory setting ZSU3 start hour ZSU3 start minute ZSU3 end hour ZSU3 end minute ZSU3 Sunday ZSU3 Monday ZSU3 Tuesday ZSU3 Wednesday ZSU3 Thursday ZSU3 Friday ZSU3 Saturday Enable ZSU5 ZSU5 start time Device conf. Date/time display … 0 … 0 No No No No No No No No Enable ZSU4 ZSU4 start time ZSU master size … No 0~23 0~59 0~23 0~59 Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Enable ZSU3 ZSU3 start time ZSU master size … Yes/no ZSU2 start hour ZSU2 start minute ZSU2 end hour ZSU2 end minute ZSU2 Sunday ZSU2 Monday ZSU2 Tuesday ZSU2 Wednesday ZSU2 Thursday ZSU2 Friday ZSU2 Saturday Level … HW ver.: SW ver. : Ser.no. : Sys.err : Reset parameter Reset BAC name Reset BAC description Reset all 39  GEZE IO 420 watchdog Parameters SD card Conf. door … Conf. KZF … KZF1 duration 3~90 KZF1 abort Yes/ No KZF1 retrigger Yes/ No Alarm suppression … ~ 250 50 Alarm delay 0~250 100 Param. IO420 -> SD Param. SD->IO420 BAC-Name IO420 -> SD BAC-Name SD>IO420 … Passwords for BACnet Password for DCC service in BACnet: GEZE Password for reinitialization service (cold and warm start): GEZE-IO420 40 10 Hierfür wird das ST 220 benötigt. Gegebenenfalls können die Daten am PC weiter angepasst werden (Parametrierung oder Änderung der BACnet-Namen). Das Profil kann dann mittels microSD-Card auf ein anderes IO 420 mit gleicher Firmware geladen werden. Folgende Dateien werden auf der Karte erstellt: GEZE IO 420  à Namensdatei für BACnet-Namen: „IO420_V1.BAC“; à Konfigurationsdatei: „IO420_V1.CON“; beinhaltet alle Parameter des IO 420. à Log-Datei: „IO420_00.LOG“ bis „IO420_39.LOG“; … Firmware update for IO 420 Je nach Einstellung werden Alarmmeldungen und Aktionen in die Log-Datei geschrieben. Wenn die LED blinkt,isdarf die microSD-Card nicht aus dem Slot herausgenommen werden. All settings are für lostmicroSD-Card when the firmware updated. Zum Entfernen und Einstecken der microSD-Card das IO 420 spannungslos schalten. … .5 Safety fuse XReset Back up name files “IO420_V1.BAC”; “IO420_V2.BAC” and “IO420MBZ1.BAC” on SD card. X Back up configuration files “IO420_V1.CON”; “IO420_V2.CON” and “IO420MBZ1.CON” on SD card. Reset-Taster Mit dem Reset-Taster kann die Werkseinstellung wiederhergestellt werden. The backed-up data may no longer be compatible after firmware conversion, but they can be adapted manually. Reset durchführen Further informationXonGerät this subject can beschalten. found in the respective information sheet. spannungslos The object descriptions cannot be backed and must be entered X „Reset-Button“ auf derupPlatine gedrückt halten. again manually. X Spannungsversorgung einschalten. Nach … Sekunden wird das Gerät auf Werkseinstellung versetzt. Firmware update … „Störung“ undinLED … „Normalbetrieb“ blinken im 0,4 Sekunden-Takt gleichzeitig. Firmware updates are LED provided by GEZE electronic form. X Wenn die LEDs blinken „Reset-Button“ loslassen. Copy the .hex file to the directory “../FlashData/IO420”. X Um das Gerät in den Betriebsmodus zurückzusetzen, Spannungsversorgung aus- und wieder X Open “IO420_Flasher.bat” using the text editor. einschalten. If the files reference is “IO420_V1.hex”, it must be changed to “IO420_V1”. CORRECT: “..\Flasher\STM32\ProgSTM32Pfs.bat 11 ..\FlashData\IO420\IO420_V1” X Save file. X Switch off the voltage supply for the IO 420. X Connect the adapter cable (mat. no.: 130829) to the IO 420. … Fig. 5: Programming adapter cable X Switch on the voltage supply for the IO 420. X Execute the “IO420_Flasher.bat” file. 41  GEZE IO 420 If the following error message appears, proceed as follows: Fig. 6: Error “wrong COM port” X Adapt COM port in file “IO420_Flasher.bat”: WRONG: ..\Flasher\STM32\ProgSTM32Pfs.bat 11 ..\FlashData\IO420\IO420_V1 CORRECT ..\Flasher\STM32\ProgSTM32Pfs.bat … ..\FlashData\IO420\IO420_V1 Fig. 7: COM port setting in the device manager X Execute “IO420_Flasher.bat” file again. The update progress is displayed in the window. The process takes several minutes. Fig. 8: Firmware update in progress. X Switch off the voltage supply, unplug the cable. X Re-boot IO 420. X After the firmware update the IO 420 must be reset to factory settings. 42 GEZE IO 420  43 Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn Korea GEZE Korea Ltd. E-Mail: info.kr@geze.com www.geze.com GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Scandinavia – Estonia GEZE Scandinavia AB eesti filial E-Mail: estonia@geze.com www.geze.ee Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu Scandinavia – Finland GEZE Scandinavia AB Filial Finland E-Mail: finland@geze.com www.geze.fi GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info.es@geze.com www.geze.es Scandinavia – Latvia GEZE Scandinavia AB Latvijas filiāle E-Mail: latvia@geze.com www.geze.lv Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Scandinavia – Lithuania GEZE Scandinavia AB Filial Lietu. E-Mail: lithuania@geze.com www.geze.lt Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l. Unipersonale E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: duesseldorf.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax.: 0049 7152 203 310 info@geze.com ∙ www.geze.com Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com South Africa GEZE South Africa (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch Türkiye GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com

Toplock CTI, CTI B TOPLOCK CTS V, CTS BV

Code Number Keypad Toplock • Operating and installation instructions, Material no. 129510 TOPLOCK CTI, CTI B • • Mat. no. TOPLOCK CTI Mat. no. TOPLOCK CTI B : 090061 : 090063 TOPLOCK CTI, CTI B 12V-24V DC 12V AC Relay Control unit DCU1 DCU1-2M Control unit DCU2 (-F, -I) DCU5 … 24V … 24V … GND … GND KB … 24VAKKU KB … 24V KB 20 KB 20 TOPLOCK CTS V, CTS BV • • Mat. no. TOPLOCK CTS V : 090077 Mat. no. TOPLOCK CTS BV: 090079 TOPLOCK CTS V, CTS BV L 230V 50Hz 230V 50Hz N PE Control unit DCU1 DCU1-2M KL1 Relay Control unit DCU2 (-F, -I) DCU5 KL3 NO KB … 24VAKKU KB … 24V C 20 KB 20 KB NC KL2 Keypad … 2 … 4 … 6 … 8 … 129750 revision status 00 Connection diagram code number keypad Toplock CTI, CTS 1/1 GEZE GmbH P.O. Box 1363 71226 Leonberg Germany GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Str. 21-29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel. +49 (0)71 52-203-0 Fax +49 (0)71 52-203-310 GEZE Online: www.geze.com GEZE Branches Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord/Ost Bühringstr.8 13086 Berlin (Weissensee) Tel. +49(0)30-47 89 90-0 Fax. +49(0)30-47 89 90-17 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Nordsternstraße 65 45329 Essen Tel. +49(0)201-830 82-0 Fax. +49(0)201-830 82-20 E-Mail: essen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte Adenauerallee … 61440 Oberursel (b. Frankfurt) Tel. +49(0)61 71-6 36 10-0 Fax. +49(0)61 71-6 36 10-1 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21-29 71229 Leonberg Tel. +49(0)7152-203-594 Fax. +49(0)7152-203-438 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com Subsidiaries Germany GEZE Sonderkonstruktionen GmbH Planken … 97944 Boxberg-Schweigern Tel. +49(0)7930-92 94-0 Fax. +49(0)7930-92 94-10 E-Mail: sk.de@geze.com GEZE SERVICE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Str.25 71229 Leonberg Tel. +49(0)7152-92 33-0 Fax. +49(0)7152-92 33-60 E-Mail: info@geze-service.com Asia Europe GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Shuangchenzhong Road Beichen Economic Development Area (BEDA) Tianjin 300400, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0) 22-26 97 39 95-0 Fax. +86 (0) 22-26 97 27 02 E-Mail: sales-info@geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L ZAC de l’Orme Rond RN 19 77170 Servon Tel. +33 (0) … 60 62 60 70 Fax. +33 (0) … 60 62 60 71 E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai Room 3010 Tower 2, Grand Gateway No. … HongQiao Road, XuHui District 200030 Shanghai, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0) 21 64475908 Fax. +86 (0) 21 64472007 E-Mail: gezesh@geze.com.cn Great Britain GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou Room 17C3 Everbright Bank Building, No.689, Tian He Bei Road 510630 Guangzhou, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0) 20 3873842 Fax. +86 (0) 20 38731834 E-Mail: gezegz@geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing No. 6-32 Building Jili Avenue Daxing District 100076 Beijing, P.R. China Tel. +86 (0) 10 87965152 Tel. +86 (0) 10 87975178 Fax. +86 (0) 10 87971476 E-Mail: gezebj@geze.com.cn Italy GEZE Italia Srl Via Giotto … 20040 Cambiago (MI) Tel. +39 (0) 02 95 06 95-11 Fax. +39 (0) 02 95 06 95-33 E-Mail: italia.it@geze.it DCLSA Distributors (Pty) Ltd. 1027 Richards Drive, Midrand P.O. Box 7934, Midrand 1685 South Africa Tel. ++27 11 3158286 Fax. ++27 11 31558261 E-Mail: info@dclsa.co.za Middle East U.A.E. GEZE Middle East P.O. Box 17903 Jebel Ali Free Zone Dubai Tel. +971 (0) … 88 33 112 Fax. +971 (0) … 88 33 240 E-Mail: geze@emirates.net.ae Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG Bodenackerstr. 79 4657 Dulliken Tel. +41 (0) 62-285 54 00 Fax. +41 (0) 62-285 54 01 E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com Spain / Portugal GEZE Iberia S.R.L. Pol.Ind. El Pla C/Comerc, 2-22, Nave 12 08980 Sant Feliu de Llobregat (Barcelona) Tel. +34 (0) … 02 19 40 36 Fax. +34 (0) … 02 19 40 35 E-Mail: info@geze.es Scandinavia GEZE Engineering Roma Srl Via Lucrezia Romana 91 00178 Roma Tel. +39 (0) 06 72 65 31 … Fax. +39 (0) 06 72 65 31 36 E-Mail: roma@geze.biz Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. Industrieterrein Kapelbeemd Leemkuil … 5626 EA Eindhoven Tel. +31 (0) 40 26 29 08 … Fax. +31 (0) 40 26 29 08 … E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com South Africa GEZE SERVICE GmbH Niederlassung Berlin Bühringstr.8 13086 Berlin (Weissensee) Tel. +49(0)30-47 02 17-30 Fax. +49(0)30-47 02 17-33 Yourattentionisdrawntothe “productliabilitylaw“definedliabilityto themanu-facturerforhisproducts whicharecon-tainedinthemain catalogue(productinformation,usage, misuses,productactivity,product maintenance,thedutytoinformandthe dutytoinstruct).Noncompliancewith theseconditionsre-lievesthe manufacturerfromanyliability. GEZE UK Ltd. Blenheim Way Fradley Park Lichfield Staffordshire WS13 8SY Tel. +44 (0) 15 43 44 30 00 Fax. +44 (0) 15 43-44 30 01 E-Mail: info@geze-uk.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp. z o.o. Ul. Annopol 21 03-236 Warszawa Tel. +48 (0) 22 440 44 40 Fax. +48 (0) 22 440 44 00 E-Mail: geze@geze.pl Austria GEZE Austria GmbH Mayrwiesstraße 12 5300 Hallwang b. Salzburg Tel. +43 (0) 662 66 31 42 Fax. +43 (0) 662 66 31 42-15 E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB Mallslingan 10 Box 7060 18711 Täby Tel. +46 (0) 8-732 34-00 Fax. +46 (0) 8-732 34-99 E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge Postboks 63 2081 Eidsvoll Tel. +47 (0) 639 572 00 Fax. +47 (0) 639 571 73 E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com Finland GEZE Finland Branch office of GEZE Scandinavia AB Postbox 20 Herralantie 824 15871 Hollola Tel. +358 (0) 10-400 5100 Fax. +358 (0) 10-400 5120 E-Mail: finland.se@geze.com Denmark GEZE Denmark Branch office of GEZE Scandinavia AB Høje Taastrup Boulevard 53 DK - 2630 Taastrup Tel. +45 46-32 33 24 Fax. +45 46-32 33 26 E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com GEZE Representative: Id. No. 129750 Modification level 00 • Drawing No.. 21207-9-0964 • Printed in Germany • Subject to change without notice The hallmark DIN ISO 9001 of our enterprise

for RC … adapters made of stainless steel

Montageanleitung für RC2-Adapter aus rostfreiem Edelstahl Installation instructions for RC2-Adapter made of stainless steel 1. 2. 3. Ø3 4. 5.

IQ lock Commissioning and connection guide (EN)

IQ lock – self-locking panic locks for 1- and 2-leaf doors IQ lock AUT IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL IQ lock EM / IQ lock EM DL IQ lock C / IQ lock C DL 157720-07 EN Commissioning and connection instructions  IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Contents Key to symbols … Product designation … Product liability … Abbreviations … 2 … Safety notes … Intended use … Technical safety … Safety-conscious working … Cleaning and care … Accessories … Assembly and installation … Use of motor locks IQ lock EL/IQ lock EL DL on fire and smoke protection doors … 2 Your contribution to environmental protection … 3 Functions and properties … Overview of functions … Explanation of terms, functions and properties … 4 Technical data … IQ lock … Rod drive IQ AUT … 10 Power supply NT … -24 … 10 Power supply NT … -24 … 10 Power supply NT HDR-30-24 … 11 Power supply NT HDR-60-24 … 11 Motor lock control MST 210 … 11 … Electrical connection … 12 … Motor lock control MST 210 in connection with IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL … 12 Rod drive IQ AUT … 19 Lever lock IQ lock EM … 21 Contact lock IQ lock C … 22 … Wiring diagrams … 23 … IQ lock EL with motor lock control MST 210 … 23 Standard connection IQ LOCK EL / MST 210 with low pass filter from HW 159073 … 24 IQ lock EL with programme switch and activation … 25 IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I) and activation … 26 IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I), TZ 320 SN and activation … 28 IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) and activation … 30 IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I), TZ 320 SN and activation … 32 IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I) and smoke control unit … 34 IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) & smoke control unit … 35 IQ lock EL with smoke control unit (RSZ 6) … 36 IQ lock EL with smoke control unit (RSZ 5) … 37 IQ lock EL with smoke control unit FA GC 150/160 … 38 IQ lock EL with TZ 320 SN and activation … 40 IQ lock EL with K600 and activation … 42 IQ lock EL with K600, TZ 320 SN and activation … 44 IQ lock AUT with K600 and activation … 46 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL  … IQ lock AUT with K600, TZ 320 SN and activation … 48 IQ lock AUT with EMD (-F, -I) and activation … 50 IQ lock AUT with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) and activation … 52 IQ lock AUT with Powerturn IS … 54 … What if? … 57 … Maintenance … 61 Key to symbols Important information and technical notes are highlighted to explain correct operation. Symbol Meaning means “important note” means “additional Information” X Symbol for an action: This means you have to do something. only applies for IQ lock for 1-leaf doors only applies for IQ lock DL for 2-leaf doors Product designation Lock type Electric full-panic motor lock Electrical motor lock Electro-mechanical lever lock Mechanical contact lock Mechanical lock 1-leaf – IQ lock EL IQ lock EM IQ lock C IQ lock M 2-leaf IQ lock AUT IQ lock EL DL IQ lock EM DL IQ lock C DL IQ lock M DL Product liability In compliance with the liability of the manufacturer for his products as defined in the German “Product Liability Act”, compliance with the information contained in this brochure (product information and intended use, misuse, product performance, product maintenance, obligations to provide information and instructions) must be ensured. Failure to comply releases the manufacturer from its statutory liability. Abbreviations VB Solid leaf RR Tubular frame … Safety notes … Safety notes … Intended use IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Self-locking panic locks are components used to lock emergency exit doors/panic exit doors on rescue routes. When self-locking anti-panic locks are used, the technical data and environment conditions of these installation and operating instructions must be taken into account. The safety features of these products are important for conformity with EN 179 and EN 1125. No modifications of any kind are permitted other than those described in these instructions. X X X Operate the locks only in installation positions typical for locks i.e. vertical with horizontally locking bolt. Always operate the locks in such a way that the panic function works in the direction of escape. Use these locks on emergency exit doors in accordance with EN 179 and panic exit doors in accordance with EN 1125 only in connection with the officially approved sliding door fittings (see certificates for constancy of performance, chapter 7). The self-locking panic locks are suitable for use on single- and double-leaf panic doors. à They are not designated for use on double-action doors. à Use in transport technology (pedestrian traffic and transport of goods by road, rail, air and water) must be agreed with the manufacturer. The product should be installed or incorporated in such a way that effortless access to the product is guaranteed during any repairs and/or maintenance, and that any removal costs do not stand out of proportion to the value of the product. Trouble-free functioning of the locks is only ensured if a carry bar and a door closer system in accordance with EN 1158 with closing sequence control are mounted. Before mounting the escape door locks ensure that the door is fitted properly and not distorted in any way. X Install the escape door locks only in hollow doors that are designed for this purpose by the manufacturer. The horizontal bar must be mounted in such a way that the greatest possible effective bar length is achieved. X Avoid safety risks during the installation of emergency exit devices with handle operation (in particular in case of doors with graded surfaces: jamming of fingers or clothes). X If necessary, adapt installation to the majority of the users: à Installation height for children smaller than 900–1000 mm à Door closer installation in such a way that children, elderly or impaired persons are not impeded Only devices conforming to standard may be used for keeping emergency exit doors and panic exit doors closed. In conformity with the specifications of German building regulation laws, a lock of the VS-type A in accordance with EN 179 or EN 1125 (lock only for 1-leaf doors) can also be used in the active leaf of a 2-leaf door if: a) the passive leaf lock is secured against incorrect operation and b) the passage width of the active leaf is sufficient for an escape route. … Technical safety à Improper installation and maintenance work or repairs can lead to significant hazards for the user. Installation and maintenance work or repairs may only be carried out by GEZE and their authorised specialists. à Damage to GEZE IQ locks can endanger your safety. Check them for visible signs of damage. Never put a damaged lock into operation. … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Safety notes à Warranty claims will be rendered invalid if the lock is not repaired by GEZE or an authorised GEZE service partner. à GEZE only guarantees that safety requirements are met if genuine GEZE spare parts are used. Faulty components may only be replaced by genuine parts. à GEZE self-locking panic locks must not be opened. … Safety-conscious working Work on the electrical equipment (IQ AUT, IQ lock EL, IQ lock EL DL, IQ lock EM, IQ lock EM DL, IQ lock C, IQ lock C DL) may only be performed by a qualified electrician. Locks may only be installed by a specialist from the respective trade (locksmith, carpenter etc.). Only genuine GEZE spare parts or accessories approved by GEZE may be used. Please contact GEZE for information about the later connection of further accessory parts. à Remove the lock before drilling the fixing points for the door fittings. à Do not put any greases, lubricants or oils in the lock. Avoid water penetrating the lock case or the formation of condensation. à Only use lubricants approved by GEZE for lubricating the outer parts (bolt, latch), see chapter … . à Never paint or varnish over the lock face plate or any other parts of the locks. à Remove the lock before doing any painting work. à The handle pin must not be forced through the lock follower. à The door leaf must not be carried by the handle. … Cleaning and care GEZE self-locking panic locks may only be oiled or greased using lubricants approved by GEZE. Lubricant Klübersynth LI 44-22 Fin Lube TF … Manufacturer Klüber Lubrication Interflon Comment Slightly wet the latch and bolt Spray onto the latch and bolt from the outside Accessories GEZE self-locking panic locks may only be used with the accessories prescribed by GEZE. X Only use genuine GEZE accessories. à If other parts are attached or installed, any warranty, guarantee and/or product liability claims will be rendered invalid. … Assembly and installation Some safety rules must always be observed during assembly and installation of the self-locking GEZE panic locks. These must be noted and followed, since the device can otherwise be damaged and result in hazards for the user: When installing the locks, make sure you following building regulations and any specifications issued by the door manufacturer. à The lock must not be modified in any way. à Lock and original strike plate (1-leaf) as well as lock and original strike box (2-leaf) form one unit. Perfect function is only possible in combination. à If installation is faulty or improper, all manufacturer guarantee and liability claims will be rendered invalid. X … Use of motor locks IQ lock EL/IQ lock EL DL on fire and smoke protection doors GEZE motor locks, IQ lock EL for 1-leaf and IQ lock EL DL for 2-leaf fire and smoke protection doors may be used in all modes of operation (permanently unlocked, secured by day, night mode). It must be guaranteed that in the event of a fire in the case of the modes of operation “permanently unlocked” and “secured by day” the electrical activation of the lock is no longer possible, the lock can no longer be unlocked and the cross latch and bolt engage securely in the strike plate at all times. … Your contribution to environmental protection IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL In order to interrupt this electrical activation in case of a fire, permissible fire detectors with trigger mechanisms, in accordance with the DIBt guideline, must be employed for hold-open systems. When motor locks are used on fire and smoke protection doors, three different installation situations can occur. The following chapters must be heeded in this case. … .1 Release via on-site fire alarm system Connection of an on-site fire alarm system (BMA) to the motor lock control (MST 210). This connection is implemented via the “smoke detector” input especially provided. A potential-free or non-isolated contact is required for that by the BMA. The planning of the installation of the smoke detectors is implemented on-site. It should be pointed out that when motor locks are used, smoke detectors in accordance with the above-mentioned guideline must be fitted. Smoke development on both sides of the door must be identified by the BMA. … .2 Triggering via trigger mechanism of hold-open systems In accordance with the DIBt guideline for hold-open systems, the following is necessary, taking account of the difference for the use of the “permanently unlocked” and “secured by day” modes of operation described: Ceiling height above lintel lower edge ≤ … m … ceiling-mounted detectors are required Deviation from DIBt guideline: The installation of only one lintel-mounted detector is not authorised in this case, since the fire can only be detected on one side if the door is closed. Ceiling height above lintel lower edge > 1m … ceiling-mounted detectors and … lintel-mounted detector are required. This corresponds to … ceiling-mounted detectors and … smoke control unit. The smoke control unit (RSZ … and RSZ 6, includes power supply + … lintel-mounted detector) is connected directly to the MST in accordance with wiring diagram. … .3 Motor lock in „night mode“ mode of operation The motor lock is used in “night mode” mode of operation only. In the “night mode” mode of operation, the automatic bolt projection of 20 mm is implemented every time the door is closed. GEZE access control, for example, regulates controlled admission. In this case, the bolt is retracted and the door can be passed through against the direction of escape. With the motor lock control MST 210, different release times can be set using a DIP switch. Setting of the release time Opening time “x” = … s Setting options for release time: Switch … 2 … 4 Switch position Release time ON x+1s ON (x) + … s ON (x) + … s ON (x) + 10 s Example: Set release time = … s In order to ensure that the lock locks itself mechanically (particular for fire protection), the hold-open time must not exceed … seconds. For this reason only switches … and … may be active in case of the DIP switch. In the case of fire protection doors it must be ensured that the door does not burst open due to the seal pressure. … Your contribution to environmental protection à When disposing of the self-locking panic locks, separate the different materials and have them recycled. à Legal regulations must be observed during the disposal of self-locking panic locks. à GEZE self-locking panic locks are certified with the Environmental Product Declaration according to ISO 14025 from the Institut Bauen und Umwelt e.V. (Institute for Construction and the Environment). This statement of approval describes the specific environmental performance of the IQ locks and confirms that the GEZE lock family promotes environmentally friendly and healthy construction work. … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Functions and properties … Overview of functions Function / property Functions and properties IQ lock AUT * IQ lock EL/ EL DL       IQ lock EM/ EM DL   – IQ lock C/ C DL   – IQ lock M/ M DL   –           – IQ lock EL IQ lock EM IQ lock C IQ lock M Secured by day with electric strike function  ** Motor-driven unlocking  Permanently unlocked  Outside handle, can be electrically engaged – Automatic locking mechanism in the event  *** of a power failure Automatic resetting of the release if door is  not opened Input for fire alarm system (locking)  Unlocking by key  ****  **   –  – – –  – – – – – – – – – – –  – – –   –  –  –  Operating voltage 24 V 12–24 V – – Feedback contacts for lock states Optional sabotage monitoring or cylinder contact     12 V, 24 V, 48 V     – – Can be used on the left and right  Same installation dimensions for all IQ locks  ***** Backset 35, 40, 45, 55, 60, 65, 70, 80, 100  Distance 72, 74, 78, 92, 94  … mm handle follower à continuous  à divided –     –             – –   –  – Tested according to EN 1125 Tested according to EN 179 Tested according to EN 1634 VdS recognition    IQ lock EL    IQ lock EM    IQ lock C    IQ lock M Panic function Mechanical self-locking Electric sequential control Statement of approval for emergency exits Statement of approval for fire protection doors Resistance Class (RC) …    –  Available – Not possible * Rod drive IQ AUT and IQ lock EL DL = IQ lock AUT ** Active leaf for IQ lock DL *** In connection with a power storage device / power pack **** Unlocking via active leaf ***** IQ AUT 42 x 400 x … mm … Explanation of terms, functions and properties Panic function The lock can be unlocked at any time by pressing the door handle/panic bar in the direction of escape. Door fittings According to EN 179 or 1125, the door fittings must be tested together with the lock. Tested door fittings can be found in the certificates for constancy of performance at www.geze.com/geze/downloads. … Functions and properties IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Mechanical re-locking Locking of the two cross latches is activated by actuating the auxiliary latch. Locking of the two cross latches only takes place after this has engaged and positioned itself in the strike plate. Bolt projection only takes place after the cross latch has been positioned in the strike plate. Electric sequential control During release time, tampering attempts on the auxiliary latch by the control unit are ignored and the bolt remains retracted. After the set release time has expired, the bolt is extended when the auxiliary latch is activated. The control unit detects the tampering attempt by the check on the door position and the motor retracts the bolt again. Secured by day with electric strike function In adjustable daytime operation, the bolt remains retracted even if the door has closed and the two cross latches are in place. The door cannot be passed from the outside, from the inside escape is possible at all times due to the panic function. In connection with access control, for example, the shortest possible opening times well under one second are achieved, which has only been possible with electric strikes before. Exception: In the event of a fire the door is completely locked. The motor lock control unit is activated directly by the fire alarm system in this case (see chapter … ). Permanently unlocked Alongside automatic re-locking (“night mode” mode of operation) and secured daytime operation (“secured by day” mode of operation), the third mode of operation “permanently unlocked” is possible (see Setting permanently unlocked, chapter … ). Here, the bolt is retracted and the cross latches are unstable. The door can be pulled or pushed open at any time by hand. Exception: In the event of a fire the door is locked completely after the door leaf has closed. The motor lock control unit is activated directly by the fire alarm system in this case. Outside handle, can be electrically engaged When the supply voltage is applied to the lock, the outside handle is engaged and remains engaged as long as current is flowing (fail-secure principle). As soon as the voltage supply stops, the outside handle is disabled and the door can no longer be opened using the handle. The panic function is retained. Thanks to the exchange function integrated in all our locks, the lock can be opened using the matching key (e.g. by the fire brigade). Automatic locking mechanism in the event of a power failure In the event of a power failure, the motor is activated via the capacitor integrated in the control unit in such a way that the slide bolt in the lock can move to the “night mode” position. This automatically pre-closes the bolt when the door is closed. If the door is still open at this point, the bolt projection is controlled via the auxiliary latch when the door is closed. Input for fire alarm system The automatic locking mechanism of the motor lock in the event of a fire is activated via the input for the fire alarm system on the motor lock control unit. This takes place automatically no matter which mode of operation is selected (night mode, secured by day or permanently unlocked). Feedback contacts for lock states The number and type of signals as well as the maximum load of the switch contacts can be found in chapters … and … . Sabotage monitoring The connector cable is monitored to check for interruptions in the power cable. In addition, the cover of the motor lock control can be integrated in the monitoring process by means of a cover lift-off contact. … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Technical data … IQ lock Technical data ID no. See price list IQ lock function à Panic function à Mechanical self-locking à Divided cross latch Additional function IQ lock EL à Motor-driven unlocking < … second à Three modes of operation (night mode / secured by day / permanently unlocked) à Electric sequential control à Feedback contacts for lock states à Optional sabotage monitoring or cylinder contact Additional function IQ lock EM à Outside handle, can be electrically engaged à Feedback contacts for lock states à Optional sabotage monitoring or cylinder contact Additional function IQ lock C à Feedback contacts for lock states à Optional sabotage monitoring or cylinder contact Dimensions (without face plate) à Solid leaf: à Tubular frame: Operating voltage IQ lock EL: 12–24 V DC IQ lock EM: 12 V DC, 24 V DC, 48 V DC Current consumption IQ lock EL 160 mA at 12 V DC max. … A briefly at 12 V DC 80 mA at 24 V DC max. 500 mA briefly at 24 V DC (incl. MST 210) Current consumption IQ lock EM 350 mA at 12 V DC 210 mA at 24 V DC 105 mA at 48 V DC Max. contact rating of the relays 30 V DC / 500 mA Resistance to forcing 10,000 N Technical specification à à à à à Climate / surroundings à à à à à Tested in accordance with à à à à … mm × 165 mm × (backset+ … mm) (W × H × D) … mm × 177 mm × (backset+ … mm) (W × H × D) Perfectly closing doors with door closer Always use genuine GEZE strike plate Clearance between face plate and strike plate 3–7 mm No door seals which cause pressure Bolt projection must be horizontal Service temperature: –10 … +50 °C, max. 75% rel. hum., no condensation Storage temperature: –20 … +50 °C, max. 75% rel. hum., no condensation Sprinkling not permissible Not suitable for use in very dusty atmosphere (e.g. corn mills) Not suitable for use in aggressive or highly corrosive atmosphere (e.g. chlorinated swimming baths) à Not suitable for vibration (e.g. vehicles) à Cannot be used in potentially explosive atmospheres EN 179 Emergency exit devices EN 1125 Panic locks EN 1634 Fire resistance and smoke protection test VdS recognition … Technical data … Rod drive IQ AUT ID no. Function Dimensions (without face plate) Operating voltage Current consumption Resistance to forcing Climate / surroundings Tested in accordance with … Guidelines/standards 089862 Power supply for IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL 230 V AC (+10 / –15%) 250 mA 24 V DC (±5%) 800 mA … W 92 × 32 × 32 mm (W × H × D) Flush-mounted installation Wire sleeves type 10CC IP54 - according to data sheet IP20 II à Ambient temperature –10 °C … +50 °C ; à Storage temperature –40 °C … +70 °C EN 60950-1; EN 55022 , EN 55024 Power supply NT … -24 ID no. Function Input voltage Input current Output voltage Output current Output power Dimensions Type of installation Connection IP rating Protection class Environmental conditions Guidelines/standards 10 153755 Motor-driven unlocking of the passive leaf (< … seconds) 42 × 400 × … mm (W × H × D) 24 V DC (±15%) max. … A at 24 V DC 10,000 N à Service temperature: –20 … +60 °C, max. 75% rel.hum., no condensation à Sprinkling not permissible à Not suitable for use in very dusty atmosphere (e.g. corn mills) à Not suitable for use in aggressive or highly corrosive atmosphere (e.g. chlorinated swimming baths) à Not suitable for vibration (e.g. vehicles) à Cannot be used in potentially explosive atmospheres à EN 179 Emergency exit devices à EN 1125 Panic locks à EN 1634 Fire resistance and smoke protection test Power supply NT … -24 ID no. Function Input voltage Input current Output voltage Output current Output power Dimensions Type of installation Connection IP rating Protection class Environmental conditions … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL 109637 Power supply for IQ lock EM/ IQ lock EM DL 230 V AC (±15%) 150 mA (short-term 300 mA) 24 V DC (–8%, +5%) 260 mA … W 88 × 88 × 53 mm (W × H × D) (dimensions of the surface-mounted housing) Flush-mounted installation (scope of delivery, pre-mounted in surface-mounted housing ID 103662) Screw-type terminals … ... … mm² IP20 II à Service temperature: … .... +60 °C à Storage temperature: -20 ... +60 °C à Relative humidity max. 93% (at 40 °C) DIN EN 50 081-1, DIN EN 55011, EN 50082-2 DIN EN 61 000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -11 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Power supply NT HDR-30-24 ID no. Function Input voltage Input current Output voltage Output current Output power Dimensions Type of installation Connection IP rating Protection class Environmental conditions Guidelines/standards … 151425 Power supply for IQ AUT 230 V AC (±15%) 480 mA 24 V DC (±10%) … A 36 W 78 × 93 × 56 mm (W × H × D) Top hat rail (DIN-TS35/ … or 15 possible) Screw-type terminals IP54 II Service temperature: -20 .... +60 °C Relative humidity 20 ... 90% UL60950-1 : EN 55011, EN 55032 Power supply NT HDR-60-24 ID no. Function Input voltage Input current Output voltage Output current Output power Dimensions Type of installation Connection IP rating Protection class Environmental conditions Guidelines/standards … Technical data 151424 Power supply for several components 230 V AC (± 15%) … A 24 V DC (±10%) … A 60 W 78 × 93 × 56 mm (W × H × D) top hat rail Screw-type terminals … mm² IP54 II Service temperature: -10 .... +50 °C UL60950-1; UL508 Motor lock control MST 210 X Follow the mechanical installation instructions for motor lock IQ lock. ID no. 103671 Function Control unit for motor lock IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL Dimensions 140 × 140 × 79 mm (W × H × D) Weight … kg Operating voltage 12–24 V DC (–10%, +15%) Current consumption à à à à Terminals Plug/screw-type terminals, max. cable cross-section … mm² Max. contact rating of the relays (X2) 30 V DC / … A Max. lock switch contact load (X3) 30 V DC / 500 mA 160 mA at 12 V DC max. … A briefly at 12 V DC 80 mA at 24 V DC max. 500 mA briefly at 24 V DC (incl. IQ lock) Max. length of connection cable to the lock 10 m IP rating in accordance with DIN 40050 IP54 Environmental conditions in accordance with DIN 40040 à Service temperature: JWF (–10…+50°C, max. 75% rel. hum., no condensation) à Storage temperature: HPE (–25…+85°C, max. 95% rel. hum., no condensation) 11 Electrical connection … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Electrical connection X Use wire-end ferrules for wire cores. à Work on the electrical equipment (IQ AUT, IQ lock EL, IQ lock EL DL, IQ lock EM, IQ lock EM DL) may only be performed by a qualified electrician. à The electrical connection work must be carried out in accordance with the relevant regulations of the VDE and local utility companies. The electrical connection for the motor locks (IQ AUT, IQ lock EL, IQ lock EL DL) and lever locks (IQ lock EM, IQ lock EM DL) must be carried out according to the enclosed wiring diagrams. The technical data listed (see chapter 4) must be taken into account: à The rated voltage of the motor / magnet in the lock with the output voltage of the power supply or device to be activated. à The power consumption of the motor / magnet with the output power of the power supply or device to be activated. à The maximum switching power of the switch contacts with the respective power to be switched. … Motor lock control MST 210 in connection with IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL … .1 Connections X10 Cover monitoring (OUT) 23 NC 22 COM 22 23 X7 24 25 X8 X1 … 6 X5 … 9 X4 LED2 LED3 LED4 21 20 X3 ON X6 LED5 … 5 … 4 … 2 … 4 X9 LED6 LED1 Light emitting diodes LED1 Supply voltage LED2 Day/night mode (day=on) LED3 Release X11 X2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 12 27 28 … 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 X6 Mode of operation (IN) … Day / night mode … 24V ext. … Release … 24V ext. … X3 Bolt switch contact (OUT) 21 COM 20 NO JP2 … X4 Smoke detector (IN) … NC … COM X A jumper must be inserted if no smoke detector is used. See the following pages for further application options (24V) JP1 X7 Power supply … GND in … 12V / 24V DC in F1 X5 Door contact (IN) … NO / NC … 24V ext. X10 F2 X8 Cylinder contact / Sabotage (OUT) 25 NO / NC 24 COM Jumper JP1 Smoke detector function JP2 12 V / 24 V LED4 Fault/alarm LED5 Door handle LED6 Door status X1 Lock 27 Cable black 28 Cable red … Cable blue 31 Cable pink 32 Cable grey 33 Cable yellow 34 Cable green 35 Cable brown 36 Cable white 37 Cable violet 38 Cable red/blue 39 Cable grey/pink X2 Outputs 10 Relay day/night mode COM 11 Relay day/night mode NO 12 Relay release COM 13 Relay release NO 14 Relay fault/alarm COM 15 Relay fault/alarm NC 16 Relay door handle COM 17 Relay door handle NO 18 Relay door status COM 19 Relay door status NO X9 RS485 interface X11 Programming interface IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Electrical connection Light emitting diode displays Function LED1 off LED1 on Cause Power supply interrupted LED1 flashing evenly LED2 on Day circuit active LED2 off Night mode circuit active LED3 on LED3 off Activation active Night mode circuit active Consequence No control unit function Control unit and lock are working normally Fault Remedy Check voltage source Check electrical connections Bolt not extended and latches in place Bolt extended, door locked Door can be opened Door bolt extended (locked) LED4 on LED4 off Fault-free lock function Fault/alarm LED5 on Handle is actuated LED6 on Door closed (auxiliary latch and door contact closed) Setting of the release time Opening time “x” = … s Setting options for release time: Switch … 2 … 4 Switch position Release time ON x+1s ON (x) + … s ON (x) + … s ON (x) + 10 s Example: Set release time = … s Release times of 1–19 s can thus be set with a pulse control of the release input terminals X6.2 and X6.5. If a longer release time or continuous release is required, this is to be realised by a correspondingly long activation time or a continuous contact. Setting of the release time is also used to set the duration of the contacting of the release relay (X2.12 and X2.13). Inputs Terminal X7.1 X7.3 X5.2 X5.6 X4.8 X4.9 X6.2 X6.5 X6.2 Signal GND in 12 V / 24 V in 24 V external External door contact Smoke detector Smoke detector 24 V external Release 24 V external X6.4 Night mode / day Function GND power supply 12 V / 24 V DC power supply Contact connected: Door closed Connection of smoke detector with potential-free contact or as 24 V supply voltage (see Page 17) Contact connected: Mode of operation release Contact open: Mode of operation as selected below Contact connected: Mode of operation “secured by day” Contact open: Mode of operation “night mode” 13 Electrical connection IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Outputs Terminal X2.10 X2.11 X2.12 Contact NO COM NO X2.14 X2.15 Signal Relay night mode / day Relay night mode / day Relay release / activation Door drive Relay release / activation Door drive Relay fault / power failure Relay fault / power failure X2.16 X2.17 X2.18 X2.19 Door handle Door handle Door contact Door contact NO COM NO COM X3.20 X3.21 X8.25 Bolt contact Bolt contact Cable monitoring NC/ cylinder contact NO Cable monitoring / Cylinder contact Cover monitoring / MST 210 Cover monitoring / MST 210 NO COM NO X2.13 X8.24 X10.23 X10.22 COM NC COM Function Contact closed: Mode of operation day Contact open: Mode of operation night mode Contact closed: Mode of operation release / door can be passed unlocked Contact open: No release Contact open: no fault/no alarm, normal operating state Contact closed with: power failure, system failure, alarm Contact closed: Door handle actuated Contact open: Door handle not actuated Contact closed: Door contact and auxiliary latch actuated Contact open: Door contact or auxiliary latch not actuated Contact closed when bolt extended 95%. Contact is not evaluated by control unit. Cylinder contact closes a contact when the installed cylinder is turned or optional cable monitoring takes place COM NC Casing cover monitoring, closes a contact when the casing cover of the MST 210 is opened. COM Setting daytime operation If the contact between terminals X6.2 and X6.4 is closed (permanent contact) the lock runs in daytime operation. If the contact is opened, the lock runs in permanently night mode. This means that the lock automatically locks every time the door is closed. Setting permanently unlocked If the contact between terminals X6.5 and X6.2 is closed (permanent contact) the motor lock runs in permanently unlocked mode of operation. If the contact is opened, the lock runs in daytime or permanently night mode depending on the pre-set (contact between the terminals X6.2 and X6.4 closed or open). … .2 14 Terminal assignment for connector cable lock IQ lock EL to MST 210, terminal strip X1 Terminals MST 210 X1.27 X1.28 X1.2 X1.31 X1.32 X1.33 X1.34 X1.35 X1.36 X1.37 X1.38 Cable colour Cable black Cable red Cable blue Cable pink Cable grey Cable yellow Cable green Cable brown Cable white Cable violet Cable red/blue X1.39 Cable grey/pink Connector IQ lock EL Description/function PIN … Motor – PIN … Motor + PIN … +24 V PIN … Basic setting (permanently night) PIN … daytime operation PIN … Release PIN … Door handle PIN … Auxiliary latch NO PIN … Locked PIN 10 Locked PIN 11 Cable monitoring or cylinder contact can be selected via switch PIN 12 Sabotage or cylinder contact can be selected via switch IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Electrical connection Connector IQ lock EL PIN … 12 … 7 … 12 … 7 Connector for connector cable (2) black red blue pink grey yellow green brown white violet red/blue grey/pink Low pass filter (TPF) New from mid-2014. The low pass filter (TPF) ensures improved activation of the motor lock IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL. Here, the motor control cable (red and black cables) are not connected directly to the motor lock control MST 210, they are connected with terminal X12 of the additional PCB TPF. The TPF has been optimised for the new motor drive unit in the lock and for the new software (see chapter … .4 and chapter … .6). Taking the conditions listed in chapter … .7 into account, the TPF can also be used for locks with an older construction technique. Insert TPF board on MST 210 JP1 JP2 X7 … 22 23 X10 … F1 F2 24 25 X8 X1 27 28 … 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 … 6 X5 … 9 X4 … X12 LED2 X11 LED3 LED4 21 20 X3 ON X6 LED5 … 1 … 3 … 5 … 2 X X9 LED6 LED1 X11 Low pass filter X11 Low pass filter X11 X2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 X13 … .3 … 2 … 4 … 6 … 8 … 10 11 12 Connector IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL (1) black red blue orange grey yellow green brown white violet white/black white/brown Insert the TPF board (1) onto slot X9 of the motor lock control MST 210 (2). 15 23 22 … 3 X8 X1 … 6 X5 … 9 X4 JP1 LED2 24 25 … 21 20 … 9 … X9 … 2 LED5 … 2 … 4 LED6 … 5 ON LED1 X11 LED2 X13 LED4 20 21 X12 28 27 ON X6 LED5 … 4 … 2 … 4 … X9 … Connect the red and black cables from motor lock IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL with X12. X Connect all the other cables from motor lock IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL to terminal X1 of the motor lock control MST 210. X LED6 LED1 X11 X2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 X11 27 28 LED3 X3 Wire TPF with motor lock IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL X1 27 28 … 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 LED4 X4 … X2 X5 X6 X7 … LED3 X8 X3 JP2 F2 23 22 X10 27 28 … 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 F1 Wire terminal X11 (TPF) to terminal X1 (MST 210). F1 X JP2 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL,X7C / C DL, M / M DL F2 Wire TPF to MST 210 JP1 X10 24 25 Electrical connection X13 X11 27 28 X12 28 27 BK RD Kabel IQ lock EL / Kabel IQ lock EL DL … .4 Motor lock control MST 210 with new software from version … In order to improve the performance of the GEZE motor locks IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL even further, GEZE will be delivering the motor lock control MST 210 with new software from mid-2014. X For optimum use of this new version, take the respective combination possibilities between old and new products as listed in chapter … .7 into account. 16 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … .5 Electrical connection Install the MST210 printed circuit board under the cover extension kit … 1 For installation of the printed circuit board under a cover extension kit, the hatched printed circuit board elements must be broken off. X Use a pair of pliers to break off the hatched printed circuit board elements (1) at the breaking point. X Install the printed circuit board on the mounting bracket under the cover extension kit. … .6 IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL with new motor HW 11504x, C0 In order to improve the performance of the GEZE motor locks IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL even further, GEZE will be integrating a new motor from mid-2014. X For optimum use of this new version, take the respective combination possibilities between old and new products as listed in chapter … .7 into account. … .7 Combination possibilities between old and new components Due to the changes described in chapters … .3 to … .6 different combination possibilities can occur. For you to be able to identify the optimum solution for your application, the following table lists the combination possibilities with respective effect on the function. Motor in the lock new new old Software new old old Low pass filter (TFP) with with without Comment optimal permissible only without function “secured by day” current status The following combinations are not permissible: Motor in the lock new old old new Software old old new new Low pass filter (TFP) without with with without Comment not permissible not permissible not permissible not permissible 17 Electrical connection … .8 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Smoke detector A smoke detector can be connected via terminal X4, signal numbers … and 9. The smoke detector disconnects the control unit from its supply voltage and thus makes the lock – no matter which mode of operation is currently set – return to its safe initial position (night mode) via the built-in energy storage device. Connection possibilities If the system is operated without smoke detectors, a jumper must be installed between terminals … and 9. Connection for smoke detector X4 … 9 X4 … 8 Jumper position JP1 Description Connection via external 24 V supply voltage (protected against reverse polarity) Connection via potential-free normally closed contact Operating voltage Jumper position JP2 Description 12 V operating voltage 24 V operating voltage Safety fuses Designation F1 F2 … .9 Value … A, SMF 125 V, fast-acting … A, SMF 125 V, fast-acting Description Input fuse, 24 V internal Fuse for smoke detector external power supply Sabotage monitoring or cylinder contact 24 25 A switch (see chapters … .1 and … .2) on the motor lock is used to select between the modes of operation sabotage and cylinder contact. (On delivery the switch is set to cylinder contact). There is a rectangular recess in the lock case approx. … mm above the handle follower at the right of the lock case edge. Here you can use a screwdriver (size 1) to switch the mode of operation (S = Sabotage, Z = Cylinder contact). Cylinder contact In the mode of operation cylinder contact, actuation of the lock cylinder is reproduced at terminals X8.25 and X8.24. The cover is also monitored at terminals X10.23 and X10.22. Cylinder contact 24 25 18 Cover monitoring 22 23 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Electrical connection Cable and cover monitoring MST 210 Terminal X10.22 is connected with terminal X8.25 to use sabotage monitoring (comprising cable and cover monitoring). The sabotage monitoring signal is then tapped via terminals X10.23 and X8.24. The circuit is opened in the event of a fault (cover open or cable fault). Cover monitoring/cable monitoring Connections X1 - connection for power supply device, inputs and outputs Connection Wire colour Signal Function X1.1 blue – BU GND in Voltage supply X1.3 red – RD 24 V (DC in) X1.2 – – 24 V DC X1.5 brown – BN Input Release X1.20 white – WH Output … (locked) Output … X1.21 grey – GY COM X1.22 pink – PK Unlocked Output … X1.21 grey – GY COM X1 … 20 21 22 … .1 … Rod drive IQ AUT … X4 … 1 X10 22 23 … 42 41 43 42 41 X8 24 25 X5 Input A potential-free contact (normally open contact) must be connected to pins X1.2 and X1.5. If the contact is activated, IQ AUT moves to the unlocked position where it remains for the hold-open time. The time starts once the contact has been disconnected. Output IQ AUT has two outputs with the potential which is connected to pin X1.21. The output “unlocked” is closed when the drive rod is in the unlocked position. Output … can be set (see Service menu). X4 - connection for ST220 ConnecSignal tion X4.1 X4.2 X4.42 Connection for ST220 X4.41 X4.43 Function GND 24V DC RS485-A RS485-B – X5 - connection for GEZE-BUS (e.g.: IO 320) Connection Wire colour Signal X5.42 yellow – YE GEZE-BUS X5.41 green – GN Function RS485-A RS485-B 19 Electrical connection IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL DIP switch (back of PCB) à The DIP switch (1) can be used to switch the terminating resistor for RS485 on and off. à If there are more than two bus devices, the resistance must be switched on in the first and last device. … X4 ON 43 41 42 … 1 22 21 20 … x1 … 3 … OFF … .2 Service menu Level … Configuration Level … Speed Hold-open time Language Level … Output … Fire protection Value range 45% to 85% … to 60 sec à German à French à English à Locked à SW + … sec à Alarm Yes/no System information Maintenance Yes/no System init. Yes/no Motor replaced Yes/no Cycle [Number of cycles] Product information HW ver. SW ver. Ser. no. Vx.x Vx.x xxxxxx Diagnosis Motor state Sensor state Alarm memory Command 20 Start motor Acknowledge alarm Factory setting Current (A) Temperature Duration (sec) Current state [see below] [Cycle] [Alarm description] Factory setting 60% 10 sec German Comment Locked See below No See below Yes: When maintenance is due Yes: When system is initialised Yes: When the motor was replaced The current number of cycles The value is updated as long as the enter key on ST220 is kept pressed. See fault description IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Electrical connection Configuration/output … Output … is set permanently to the feedback “unlocked”. Output … can be configured. à “Locked”: The output is closed when the drive rod of IQ AUT is in the locked position. à “SW + … sec”: The output is closed when the input button is pressed. The output is reset after … seconds. à “Alarm”: The output is closed when an alarm is pending. Configuration/fire protection When this option is active, IQ AUT can only be controlled via the BUS interface so that it can establish faults in transmission (e.g. cable break, short-circuit etc.). For this, you need an IO 420 which is able to send suitable commands to IQ AUT and to control it. Diagnosis/sensor state The rod drive IQ AUT has … sensors inside. This menu shows which sensor is currently active. To update the table: X Keep the “Enter” key pressed. This menu is relevant for service technicians. … Rod Lckd.: Wheel * Unlckd. 1: Unlckd. 2: – * Lever lock IQ lock EM Connector cable If polarity is reversed the outside handle cannot be engaged (reverse polarity protection). … 2 Connector IQ lock EM / IQ lock EM DL Connector for connector cable … 12 … 7 … 12 … PIN Connector IQ lock EM (1) … 2 black red Connector for connector cable (2) black red … 7 blue green blue green Function Door handle contact (NO) Contact closed: Door handle actuated Magnet – GND power supply Magnet + 24 V DC … Contact – GND + 24 V DC PIN … PIN … PIN … PIN … 4 … 5 … orange yellow grey brown pink yellow grey brown Release contact (NO) Contact closed: Door handle engaged - door can be unlocked by actuating the handle PIN … Auxiliary latch (NO) Contact closed: Auxiliary latch actuated (door closed) PIN … Release PIN … PIN … 21 Electrical connection … 10 white violet IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL white violet Bolt contact (NC) Contact closed: Bolt extended Contact open: Bolt retracted PIN … PIN 10 11 12 white/black white/brown red/blue grey/pink Cylinder contact (NO) Contact closed: Cylinder contact actuated PIN 11 PIN 12 … Contact lock IQ lock C Connector cable … 2 Connector IQ lock C / IQ lock C DL Connector for connector cable … 12 … 7 … 12 … PIN Connector IQ lock C (1) … 7 blue green Connector for connector cable (2) blue green Function Door handle contact (NO) Contact closed: Door handle actuated … Contact PIN … PIN … 5 … grey brown grey brown Auxiliary latch (NO) Contact closed: Auxiliary latch actuated (door closed) … 10 white violet white violet Bolt contact (NC) Contact closed: Bolt extended Contact open: Bolt retracted PIN … PIN … PIN … PIN 10 11 12 white/black white/brown red/blue grey/pink Cylinder contact (NO) Contact closed: Cylinder contact actuated PIN 11 PIN 12 22 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams Designation IQ lock EL with motor lock control MST 210 Standard connection IQ LOCK EL / MST 210 with low pass filter from HW 159073 IQ lock EL with programme switch and activation IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I) and activation IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I), TZ 320 SN and activation IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) and activation IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I), TZ 320 SN and activation IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I) and smoke control unit IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) & smoke control unit IQ lock EL with smoke control unit (RSZ 6) IQ lock EL with smoke control unit (RSZ 5) IQ lock EL with smoke control unit FA GC 150/160 IQ lock EL with TZ 320 SN and activation IQ lock EL with K600 and activation IQ lock EL with K600, TZ 320 SN and activation IQ lock AUT with K600 and activation IQ lock AUT with K600, TZ 320 SN and activation IQ lock AUT with EMD (-F, -I) and activation IQ lock AUT with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) and activation IQ lock AUT with Powerturn IS … Chapter … Page Page 23 Page 24 … Page 25 Page 26 Page 28 Page 30 Page 32 Page 34 Page 35 Page 36 Page 37 Page 38 Page 40 Page 42 Page 44 Page 46 Page 48 Page 50 Page 52 Page 54 IQ lock EL with motor lock control MST 210 24V DC NT … -24 BN BN BU BU GN / YE N PE JP2 BK / RD … RD 27 28 … 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 F1 F2 … X7 22 23 X10 JP1 L1 BK RD BU PK GY YE GN BN WH VT RD / BU GY / PK 24 25 X8 NO … X4 … When the door is closed the contact is closed X1 X5 … COM … Door contact LE D2 LE D3 21 20 ON X6 LE D5 … 1 … 3 … NO … COM … 2 Push button / access control / SCT X9 LE D6 LE D1 X11 X2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 LE D4 X3 23 Wiring diagrams … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Standard connection IQ LOCK EL / MST 210 with low pass filter from HW 159073 24V DC NT … -24 BN BN BU BU GN / YE JP1 X10 JP2 RD 27 28 … 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 22 23 BK / RD … F1 F2 … X7 BU PK GY YE GN BN WH VT RD / BU GY / PK 24 25 X8 NO … X4 … When the door is closed the contact is closed X1 X5 … COM … Door contact LE D2 LE D3 21 20 X3 ON X6 LE D5 … 1 … 3 … 2 Push button / access control / SCT NO … X9 LE D6 … COM LE D1 X11 28 27 X12 27 28 Low pass filter (TPF) BK 24 RD X11 X2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 LE D4 L1 N PE IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Wiring diagrams IQ lock EL with programme switch and activation X Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. 24V DC NT … -24 MST 210 X7 GND in … 24 V DC in … BK / RD RD MPS-D / potential-free switch X6 24 V DC … 1 24 V DC … Release … 2 Hold open 24 V DC … 3 Day Day/night … mode … X8 … cylinder contact COM 24 NO4 cylinder contact 25 COM NO X2 … release COM Push button / access control / SCT 12 NO6 release 13 … door handle COM 17 NO8 door handle 16 Door contact X5 24 V DC … 9 contact (IN) Door … COM NO When the door is closed the contact is closed 25 Wiring diagrams … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I) and activation X X X X Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for EMD, EMD-F, EMD Invers. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. Set the parameters on the DCU2, DCU2-F, DCU-I control unit: à With DPS: Set a1 to … 8 (day-night mode switchover), parameter ®® (bolt message) to … 2 (normally closed contact) and TO (electric strike) to … 3 (motor lock) à With ST220: Set Signals Ž Output signals Ž PA1 to day/night mode switchover Set Signals Ž Input signals Ž Bolt contact type to electric strike Set Door parameters Ž Electric strike type to motor lock. à Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU2 control unit EMD Invers à If the parameter setting for the door opening output of the EMD-Invers is motor lock, the door is only held in the closing position by the IQ lock EL, no longer by the door drive. à The door opens by spring load in the event of manual opening using the door handle in the event of a panic. à After the hold-open time has expired, the door closes electromechanically and the IQ lock EL locks. à The EMD also recognises without an activation signal when the door is opened. 26 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams Push button / access control / SCT 24V DC NT … -24 COM NO MST 210 X7 GND in 24 V DC in … 3 Freigabe RD DCU2, control Slimdrive EMD active leaf PS Voltage from power supply or from DCU2 X6 24 V DC BK / RD … 5 24 V DC … Day / night mode … 24 NO cylinder contact 25 DO hold open … AUT automatic … NA night mode … 24 V DC KB X8 COM cylinder contact … 2 24 V DC 20 Mechanical contact TOE … GND COM release 12 … 24 V DC NO release 13 31 TOEA COM door handle 17 32 TOEB NO door handle 16 33 RM X2 X5 PA1 24 V DC … 55 PA1A Door contact (IN) … 56 PA1B … 24 V DC Door contact COM NO When the door is closed the contact is closed 27 Wiring diagrams … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I), TZ 320 SN and activation Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for EMD, EMD-F, EMD Invers. X Heed the wiring diagram for GEZE RWS (TZ 320). X X Disconnect the internal programme switch of the door drive. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. X Set the parameters on the DCU2, DCU2-F, DCU-I control unit: à With DPS: Set a1 to … 8 (day-night mode switchover), parameter ®® (bolt message) to … 2 (normally closed contact) and TO (electric strike) to … 3 (motor lock). à With ST220: Set Signals Ž Output signals Ž PA1 to day/night mode switchover. Set Signals Ž Input signals Ž Bolt contact type to electric strike. Set Door parameters Ž Electric strike type to motor lock. The following settings must be made on the TZ 320: X Set Output … to “MO drive”. X Set Output … to “Activation drive”. X X à Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU2 control unit 28 … 46 45 42 41 24 V DC power supply CAN-H (GEZE bus) CAN-L (GEZE bus) RS485-A RS485-B … 8 Indirect release Indirect release 11 Unlock SCT, acknowledge 22 21 … 2 51 COM output … (max. 30V, 1A) NO output … (MO drive) GND 24 V DC COM output … (max. 30V, 1A) NO output … (activ. drive) 50 … 24 V DC NO 56 … 55 33 32 31 … 1 NO COM COM 24 V DC Mechanical contact NO - + COM PA1B PA1A PA1 RM TOEB TOEA 24 V DC GND 12 Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge TOE … 20 … X 105 (black terminal strip) 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC … 1 GND KB NA night mode … 2 PS 24 V DC X 108 (blue terminal strip) optional DCU2, control Slimdrive EMD active leaf SA … 3 15 … 14 … 5 FTV 320 PE N L1 AUT automatic NO COM Push button / access control / SCT GN / YE BU 6A … BU BN X 107 (green terminal strip) 24V DC NT … -24 BN DO hold open RD BK / RD … 53 … 24 V DC Input … (fire alarm system) 15 Door closed … 2 24 V DC 52 14 door locked Input … (short-time unlocked) … Locking mechanism + Input … (short-time unlocked) … Locking mechanism + X 106 (orange terminal strip) … GND power supply X 104 (red terminal strip) TZ 320 Voltage from power supply or from DCU2 24V DC NT … -24 RD BK / RD Door contact (IN) NO door handle 16 24 V DC COM door handle 17 … NO release 13 … COM release 12 NO cylinder contact Day / night mode COM cylinder contact 24 V DC … 25 Release … 24 24 V DC … 24 V DC in GND in … 3 … When the door is closed the contact is closed NO COM Door contact X5 X2 X8 X6 X7 MST 210 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 29 Wiring diagrams … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) and activation X X Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for TSA160 NT, TSA160 NT-F, TSA160 NT Invers. Disconnect the internal programme switch of the door drive. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. X Set the parameters on the DCU5 control unit: à With DPS: Set parameter ®® ( 21 ) (bolt message) to … 2 (normally closed contact) and TO ( … 0 ) (electric strike type) to … 3 (motor lock). à With ST220: Set Input signals Ž Bolt message to electric strike. Set Door parameters Ž Electric strike type to motor lock X X à Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU5 control unit. à The GND of DCU5 (terminal TOE no. 1) must be connected with the GND in the MST 210 (terminal X7 no. 1), even when a separate power supply is used. à The day function on the lock cannot be used with analogue programme switches (DPS / TPS / MPS). 30 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams Push button / access control / SCT 24V DC NT … -24 COM NO MST 210 X7 GND in … 24 V DC in … RD Voltage from power supply *) or from DCU5 X6 24 V DC BK / RD DCU5, control TSA160 NT active leaf PS … Release … 24 V DC … Day / night mode … 24 NO cylinder contact 25 AUT automatic … 24 V DC … 24 V DC 20 Mechanical contact TOE … GND 12 … 24 V DC X2 COM release DO hold open … KB X8 COM cylinder contact … NO release 13 31 TOEA COM door handle 17 32 TOEB NO door handle 16 33 RM X5 24 V DC … Door contact (IN) … Door contact *) DCU5 GND must be connected with M ST 210 GND even if a separate power supply is used COM NO When the door is closed the contact is closed 31 Wiring diagrams … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I), TZ 320 SN and activation Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for TSA160 NT, TSA160 NT-F, TSA160 NT Invers. X Heed the wiring diagram for GEZE RWS (TZ 320). X X Disconnect the internal programme switch of the door drive. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. X Set the parameters on the DCU2, DCU2-F, DCU-I control unit: à With DPS: Set parameter ®® ( 21 ) (bolt message) to … 2 (normally closed contact) and TO ( … 0 ) (electric strike type) to … 3 (motor lock). à With ST220: Set Input signals Ž Bolt message to electric strike. Set Door parameters Ž Electric strike type to motor lock à Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU5 control unit. à The GND of the DCU5 (terminal TOE no. 1) The following settings must be made on the TZ 320: à Set Output … to “MO drive” à Set Output … to “Activation drive” à Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU5 control unit. à The GND of DCU5 (terminal TOE no. 1) must be connected with the GND in the MST 210 (terminal X7 no. 1), even when a separate power supply is used. à The day function on the lock cannot be used with analogue programme switches (DPS / TPS / MPS). X X 32 46 45 42 41 CAN-H (GEZE bus) CAN-L (GEZE bus) RS485-A RS485-B 6) … 24 V DC power supply BU BN Push button / access control / SCT GN / YE BU BN 6A 14 … 5 FTV 320 53 Input … (fire alarm system) … 7 … GND Indirect release Indirect release 11 Unlock SCT, acknowledge … 2 51 24 V DC COM output … (max. 30V, 1A) NO output … (activ. drive) 50 21 GND 22 COM output … (max. 30V, 1A) NO output … (MO drive) 24 V DC … 12 Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge X 108 (blue terminal strip) … 24 V DC X 105 (black terminal strip) … 24 V DC X 107 (green terminal strip) … 52 … 24 V DC Input … (short-time unlocked) 15 Door closed Input … (short-time unlocked) … 2 24 V DC NO COM … Door locked PE N L1 optional … 2 … 9 20 32 33 TOEB RM 31 TOEA … 2 Mechanical contact 24 V DC 24 V DC AUT automatic DO hold open NO COM COM NO COM NO - + 24 V DC GND TOE KB PS DCU5, control TSA160 NT active leaf SA 15 … 14 Locking mechanism - … 24V DC NT … -24 … RD BK / RD Locking mechanism + X 106 (orange terminal strip) … GND power supply X 104 (red terminal strip) TZ 320 Voltage from power supply *) or from DCU5 24V DC NT … -24 RD BK / RD … 2 16 17 13 12 25 24 … 2 … 2 … 1 Door contact (IN) 24 V DC NO door handle COM door handle NO release COM release NO cylinder contact COM cylinder contact Day / night mode 24 V DC Release 24 V DC 24 V DC in GND in When the door is closed the contact is closed NO COM Door contact X5 X2 X8 X6 X7 MST 210 *) DCU5 GND must be connected with M ST 210 GND even if a separate power supply is used IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 33 Wiring diagrams … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL IQ lock EL with EMD (-F, -I) and smoke control unit X X Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for EMD, EMD-F, EMD Invers. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. Set the parameters on the DCU2, DCU2-F, DCU-I control unit: à With DPS: Set a1 to … 8 (day-night mode switchover), parameter ®® (bolt message) to … 2 (normally closed contact) and TO (electric strike) to … 3 (motor lock) à With ST220: Set Signals Ž Output signals Ž PA1 to day/night mode switchover. Set Signals Ž Input signals Ž Bolt contact type to electric strike Set Door parameters ŽElectric strike type to motor lock à Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU2 control unit. à Set Jumper (J1) of the MST 210 to 2/3 (“Connection via external 24 V supply voltage”). X X EMD Invers à If the parameter setting for the door opening output of the EMD-Invers is motor lock, the door is only held in the closing position by the IQ lock EL, no longer by the door drive. à The door opens by spring load in the event of manual opening using the door handle in the event of a panic. à After the hold-open time has expired, the door closes electromechanically and the IQ lock EL locks. à The EMD also recognises without an activation signal when the door is opened. 24 V DC NT … -24 Manual trigger switch “Close door” MST 210 COM X7 GND in … 24 V DC in … NC BK / RD RD Smoke control unit - output alarm X4 JP1 COM smoke detector … + 24 V DC NC smoke detector … - GND X5 24 V DC … Door contact (IN) … DCU2-F RSZ SF DCU2-F RSZ GF RSZ_GND 61 61 RSZ_GND RSZ_24 V DC 62 62 RSZ_24 V DC Second drive 63 63 Second drive RSZ_GND 61 61 RSZ_GND Door contact COM NO When the door is closed the contact is closed 34 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Wiring diagrams IQ lock EL with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) & smoke control unit X X Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for TSA160 NT, TSA160 NT-F, TSA160 NT Invers. Disconnect the internal programme switch of the door drive. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. X Set the parameters on the DCU5 control unit: à With DPS: Set parameter ®® (bolt message) to … 2 (normally closed contact) and TO (electric strike) to … 3 (motor lock) à With ST220: Set Input signals Ž Bolt message to electric strike. Set Door parameters Ž Electric strike type to motor lock. à Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU5 control unit. à The GND of DCU5 (terminal TOE no. 1) must be connected with the GND in the MST 210 (terminal X7 no. 1), even when a separate power supply is used. à The day function on the lock cannot be used with analogue programme switches (DPS / TPS / MPS). à When the mode of operation “permanently open” or “day” is used, the jumper (J1) of the MST 210 must be set to 2/3 (“Connection via external 24 V DC supply voltage”). à When the mode of operation “night mode” is used, the smoke detector on the MST 210 must be bridged. As an option, the lock can be switched off via an on-site fire alarm system X X 24V DC NT … -24 Manual trigger switch “Close door” MST 210 COM X7 GND in 24 V DC in … 3 RD DCU5 X4 JP1 NC BK / RD COM smoke detector … 2 24 V DC NC smoke detector … 1 GND X5 24 V DC … Door contact (IN) … Smoke control unit - output alarm Circuit breaker board (ID no. 067581) … RSZ_24 V DC … RSZ_GND Reset 24 V DC + GND - Reset push button … COM … NO Door contact COM NO When the door is closed the contact is closed 35 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock EL with smoke control unit (RSZ 6) X X Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for the smoke control unit RSZ 6. Remove the red jumper from the smoke control unit (RSZ 6). Set the jumper J1 on the MST 210 to 2/3. X Set the jumper on the smoke switch (RS 5) to 1/2. X Press the reset push button for commissioning. X After release by the smoke control unit (RSZ 6) or the smoke switch (RS 5), press the reset push button. X X 24 V DC NT … -24 RSZ6 MST 210 KL1 24 V DC in … GND in … GND … HOD / hold-open device … X7 RD BK / RD … GND in … 24 V DC in … 24 V DC … Release … 24 V DC … Day / night mode X6 KL2 24 V DC … MRB / Manual trigger switch … 24 V DC … GND … 8 COM smoke detector AS / ceiling-mounted detector … 9 NC smoke detector NC alarm 10 COM alarm 11 … 24 V DC NO alarm 12 … Door contact (IN) X4 JP1 X5 Door contact Reset push button COM COM NO NO When the door is closed the contact is closed RS5 JP1 … 2 … 36 RS5 24 V DC in … 1 24 V DC in GND in … 2 GND in … 6 … 8 … 9 JP1 … 2 … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Wiring diagrams IQ lock EL with smoke control unit (RSZ 5) X X Follow the mechanical installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for the smoke control unit RSZ 5. Set the jumper on the smoke control unit (RSZ 5) to 2/3. Set the jumper J1 on the MST 210 to 2/3. X Set the jumper on the smoke switch (RS 5) to 1/2. X Press the reset push button for commissioning. X After release of the smoke control unit or the smoke switches, press the reset push button. X X Cables IQ lock MST 210 X1 Lock 27 28 X2 Outputs COM day/ Night mode NO day/night mode 10 11 BU … COM release 12 NO release 13 PK 31 GY 32 YE 33 GN 34 NO door handle 16 L1 L BN 35 COM Door handle 17 N N WH 36 COM door status 18 VT 37 NO door status 19 RD/BU 38 X3 RSK (OUT) GY/PK 39 COM RSK 20 NO RSK 21 … X4 Smoke detector (IN) … COM fault/ Alarm NC fault/ Alarm 17 RSZ5 15 + - J1 … 2 … 4 … 10 AL_NC … 9 AL_COM … AL_NO X6 Mode of operation (IN) 24 V DC … Release … 4 X11 24 V DC … 5 27 Day / night mode … 3 X10 Cover mon. (OUT) … COM Cylinder con. 24 … NO cylinder con. 25 J1 28 X13 X12 BK 27 RD 28 TPF X9 GND in … 24 V DC in … 1 … X8 Cyl. con./ sabo (OUT) COM Cylinder con. 24 NO cylinder con. 25 … 2 X5 Door contact (IN) TK … 2 … X7 Power supply … J1 … 2 … 2 24 V DC NO … Door contact (IN) … 4 … 5 … 6 NT 24V DC + - … 5 … COM J1 … 2 … 9 … 10 … RS … 9 10 Reset RS … COM NO 37 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock EL with smoke control unit FA GC 150/160 X X Follow the mechanical installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for the hold-open system FA GC 150. Set jumper J3 on the smoke control unit (RSZ6) to 2/3. Separate the breaking point in the first relay base. X Do not separate the breaking point in the last relay base. X Set jumper J1 on the MST 210 to 2/3. X Press the reset push button for commissioning. X After release of the smoke control unit or the smoke switches, press the reset push button. X X 38 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Cables IQ lock Wiring diagrams MST 210 X1 Lock 27 28 X2 Outputs COM day/ Night mode NO day/night mode 10 - 11 + BU … COM release 12 PK 31 NO release 13 RSZ6 KL1 17 … 24V 15 … GND GY 32 YE 33 COM fault/ Alarm NC fault/ Alarm GN 34 NO door handle 16 … GND BN 35 COM Door handle 17 … HOD ext. WH 36 COM door status 18 KL2 VT 37 NO door status 19 … RD/BU 38 X3 RSK (OUT) … MRB GY/PK 39 COM RSK 20 … 24V DC NO RSK 21 … GND X4 Smoke detector (IN) … AS … 10 AL_NC … 11 AL_COM 12 AL_NO J1 … 2 … 4 X6 Mode of operation (IN) 24V DC 24 V DC … KL3 Release … 1 GND X11 24 V DC … 2 HOD int. 27 Day / night mode … J1 … 2 X10 Cover mon. (OUT) J2 … 2 J3 … 2 … X13 X12 BK 27 RD 28 X9 TPF COM Cylinder con. 24 NO cylinder con. 25 X7 Power supply GND in … 24 V DC in … X8 Cyl. con./ sabo (OUT) COM Cylinder con. 24 NO cylinder con. 25 24 V Terminal box 28 GND 24 V R … 2 ASin ASout GC 152/153 X5 Door contact (IN) TK NT 24V DC COM … 24 V DC NO … Door contact (IN) 24 V GND NT 24V DC + - 24 V R … 2 ASin ASout GC 152/153 Reset COM NO 39 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock EL with TZ 320 SN and activation X X Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for GEZE RWS (TZ 320). Carry out the following settings at the TZ 320: X Set Output … to “MO drive”. X Set Output … to “TOE fail-secure” Voltage supply of the MST 210 is from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the TZ 320 control unit Option … If the motor lock is to be in mode of operation “day” when the door control unit is “permanently unlocked”, output “1” of the TZ 320 must be connected to the “day/night mode” input of the MST 210. Parameter setting for output … must be “MO drive” for this function. Option … As an option, the output “cylinder contact” (terminals 24 + 25) of the MST 210 can be connected to a configurable input of the TZ 320 (terminals … and 52 or 53). Function: When the cylinder is actuated by the key, a short-term release is triggered at the door control unit. If only short-term release is desired, the parameter setting for the input of the TZ 320 must be “short-time unlocked”. Option … As an option, the output “door handle” (terminals 16 and 17) of the MST 210 can be connected to a configurable input of the TST320 (terminals … and 52 or 53). Function: If the door handle is pressed when the control unit is locked, a “pre-alarm” is triggered. For this, the input of the TZ 320 must be configured to “door handle”. 40 … 46 45 42 41 24 V DC power supply CAN-H (GEZE bus) CAN-L (GEZE bus) RS485-A RS485-B 6A … 2 14 … 15 … 9 52 53 Door locked 24 V DC Door closed 24 V DC Input … (short-time unlocked) Input … (cylinder contact) Input … (door handle) NO COM COM NO COM NO - + … 8 Indirect release Indirect release 12 11 Lock SCT, KZF, acknowledge Unlock SCT, acknowledge 22 21 … 2 51 COM output … (max. 30V, 1A) NO output … (MO drive) GND 24 V DC COM output … (max. 30V, 1A) NO output … (TOE-fail-secure) 50 … 24 V DC Door contact (IN) 24 V DC NO door handle COM door handle NO release COM release NO cylinder contact COM cylinder contact Day / night mode 24 V DC Release 24 V DC 24 V DC in GND in When the door is closed the contact is closed NO COM Door contact … X 108 (blue terminal strip) … 2 X 105 (black terminal strip) 16 24 V DC X5 … GND 17 13 25 24 … 2 … 2 … 1 12 X2 X8 X6 X7 … RD BK / RD MST 210 X 107 (green terminal strip) NO Option … Voltage from power supply or from TZ 320 24V DC NT … -24 24 V DC COM Option … optional PE N L1 Push button / access control / SCT Option … SA … 15 14 … 5 FTV 320 GN / YE BU BN … BU BN Locking mechanism - 24V DC NT … -24 … RD BK / RD Locking mechanism + X 106 (orange terminal strip) … GND power supply X 104 (red terminal strip) TZ 320 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 41 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock EL with K600 and activation Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram of the retractable arm drive RWA K600. X Heed the wiring diagrams of the smoke and heat extraction control panels (THZ/MBZ 300). X X 42 … 1 … W1 … W7 … 3 … door/window #2 … THZ / MBZ Drives W3 Use GEZE LEM if no other motors in the line W2 3N N LEM LS … 4N 5SL6010-6 … L – PS COM AL Lock AL 1SLR Lock AL PL Lock PL 1SLR Lock PL K600 SHEV REL RLS2 RLS1 RLS2 GND 24V RLS2 RLS1 RLS2 CLOSE (+) CLOSE (-) COM NO Push buon / access control / SCT BN GND 24V BU Relay: NO OPEN (-) OPEN (+) Relay: NO VT GN HW ataD … SHEV 12-24V GND + A5,2 L juncon box - door/window #1 yNlppus rewop ⎓V42/∿V032 PE CN OPEN CLOSE (-) (+) OPEN CLOSE (+) (-) Ltg.überwachung/ … line monitoring … 1 L N PE W4 W6 … W5 1# 006K AWR 230 V / 50 Hz TK TK COM NO MST 210 24 V thgin/yaD … ebagierF … edom … X6 Mode of operaon (IN) 243 V X7 Power supply GND … 6 (NO) … contact Door X5 Door contact (IN) IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams WH BK BK 43 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock EL with K600, TZ 320 SN and activation Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram of the retractable arm drive RWA K600. X Heed the wiring diagrams of the smoke and heat extraction control panels (THZ/MBZ 300). X Heed the wiring diagram for GEZE RWS (TZ 320). X X Carry out the following settings at the TZ 320: X Output 1: Activ. drive X Output 2: MO drive X Input 3: Fire alarm system (automatic reset after adjustable time) 44 … 1 W1 … W7 … IN … 1 (High) … FTVVzu Tür 24 verriegelt (+) (-) DC X106 KZF (OG) BMA TZ 32x THZ / MBZ Drives … 3 53 52 … 2 15 … 14 … 5 W6 door/window #2 OPEN (-) OPEN (+) CLOSE … (+) CLOSE … (-) monitoring/ … line W3 Use GEZE LEM if no other motors in the line W2 3N LEM LS … 4N 5SL6010-6 … N – PS COM AL Lock AL 1SLR Lock AL PL Lock PL 1SLR Lock PL K600 SHEV REL RLS2 RLS1 RLS2 GND 24V RLS2 RLS1 RLS2 GND 24V BN CLOSE (+) CLOSE (-) Relay: NO OPEN (-) OPEN (+) GN BU Relay: NO VT HW ataD … SHEV 12-24V GND + A5,2 L juncon box - door/window #1 yNlppus rewop ⎓V42/∿V032 PE CN L W4 … 2 … L N PE TK TK COM NO W5 W6 006 K AWR 230 V / 50 Hz MST 210 24 V OUT … (NO) Acv Dr GND … OUT … (NO) MO dr 51 50 24 V DC … 21 22 TZ 32x X108 (BU) … 24 V DC thgin/yaD … ebagierF … edom … X6 Mode of operaon (IN) 243 V X7 Power supply GND … 6 (NO) … contact Door X5 Door contact (IN) IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams WH BK BK 45 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock AUT with K600 and activation Follow the installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram of the retractable arm drive RWA K600. X Heed the wiring diagrams of the smoke and heat extraction control panels (THZ/MBZ 300). X X 46 … 1 W1 … W9 … 3 … door/window #2 CLOSE … (+) CLOSE … (-) monitoring/ Line THZ / MBZ Drives W3 Use GEZE LEM if no other motors in the line W2 3N N LEM LS … 4N 5SL6010-6 … L PS COM AL Lock AL 1SLR Lock AL PL Lock PL 1SLR Lock PL K600 SHEV REL RLS2 RLS1 RLS2 GND 24V RLS2 RLS1 RLS2 GND 24V CLOSE (+) CLOSE (-) COM NO Push buon / access control / SCT BN OPEN (-) OPEN (+) Relay: NO GN BU Relay: NO CLOSE (+) CLOSE (-) VT HW ataD BN OPEN (-) OPEN (+) Relay: NO GN BU Relay: NO VT HW ataD … SHEV 12-24V GND – L A5,2 + juncon box - door/window #1 yNlppus rewop ⎓V42/∿V032 PE W8 L N PE CN … W4 W5 W7 … 2 … OPEN (-) OPEN (+) 1# 006K AWR W6 2# 006K AWR 230 V / 50 Hz TK TK COM NO NG YE PK GR WH BN RD BU ÜK 24 V thgin/yaD … ebagierF … edom … X6 Mode of operaon (IN) 243 V X7 Power supply GND … 6 (NO) … contact Door X5 Door contact (IN) MST 210 RS485-B RS485-A X5 42 41 unlckd 22 com release … 21 24V out … lckd 24V in 20 GND … IQ AUT X1 … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams WH BK BK 47 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock AUT with K600, TZ 320 SN and activation Follow the mechanical installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram of the retractable arm drive RWA K600. X Heed the wiring diagrams of the smoke and heat extraction control panels (THZ/MBZ 300). X Heed the wiring diagram for GEZE RWS (TZ 320). X X Carry out the following settings at the TZ 320: X Output 1: Activ. drive X Output 2: MO drive X Input 3: Fire alarm system (automatic reset after adjustable time) 48 … 1 W1 … W9 … 3 … IN … 1 (High) … FTVVzu Tür 24 verriegelt (+) (-) DC X106 KZF (OG) BMA TZ 32x THZ / MBZ Drives 53 52 … 2 15 … 14 … 5 W8 door/window #2 OPEN (-) OPEN (+) W3 Use GEZE LEM if no other motors in the line W2 3N N LEM LS … 4N 5SL6010-6 … L PS COM AL Lock AL 1SLR Lock AL PL Lock PL 1SLR Lock PL K600 SHEV REL RLS2 RLS1 RLS2 GND 24V RLS2 RLS1 RLS2 GND 24V BN OPEN (-) OPEN (+) CLOSE (+) CLOSE (-) Relay: NO GN BU Relay: NO CLOSE (+) CLOSE (-) VT HW ataD BN OPEN (-) OPEN (+) Relay: NO GN BU Relay: NO VT HW ataD … SHEV 12-24V GND – L A5,2 + juncon box - door/window #1 yNlppus rewop ⎓V42/∿V032 PE CN CLOSE … (+) CLOSE … (-) monitoring/ line … 1 … W4 W5 … W6 1# 006K AWR L N PE TK TK COM NO W7 W8 2# 006K AWR 230 V / 50 Hz NG YE PK GR WH BN RD BU ÜK 24 V OUT … (NO) Acv Dr GND … OUT … (NO) MO dr 51 50 24 V DC … 21 22 TZ 32x X108 (BU) … 24 V DC thgin/yaD … ebagierF … edom … X6 Mode of operaon (IN) 243 V X7 Power supply GND … 6 (NO) … contact Door X5 Door contact (IN) MST 210 RS485-B RS485-A X5 42 41 unlckd 22 com release … 21 24V out … lckd 24V in 20 GND … IQ AUT X1 … IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams WH BK BK 49 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock AUT with EMD (-F, -I) and activation X X Follow the mechanical installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for EMD, EMD-F, EMD Invers. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. Set the parameters on the DCU2, DCU2-F, DCU-I control units as follows: With DPS: à Set A1 to 18 (day and night mode switchover), parameter rr (bolt message) to 02 (normally closed contact) and to (electric strike) to 03 (motor lock). With ST220: à Set Signals Ž Output signals Ž PA1 to day/night mode switchover. à Set Signals Ž Input signals Ž Bolt contact type to electric strike. à Set Door parameters Ž Electric strike type to motor lock. X X Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU2 control unit. Voltage supply of the rod drive IQ AUT from separate 24 V DC … A power supply. EMD Invers: à If the parameter setting for the door opening output of the EMD-Invers is motor lock, the door is only held in the closing position by the IQ lock EL, no longer by the door drive. à The door opens by spring load in the event of manual opening using the door handle in the event of a panic. à After the hold-open time has expired, the door closes electromechanically and the IQ lock EL locks. à The EMD also recognises without an activation signal when the door is opened. 50 25 NO cylinder contact 13 17 16 NO release COM door handle NO door handle … Door contact (IN) Door contact GEZE BUS YE GN PK GR 41 22 Unlocked WH BN 42 21 COM X5 … 20 … 24 V DC Output … (locked) RD … 24 V DC in Release BU … 24 V DC NT … 1 20 … + GND 24V DC PA1A PA1B PA2 … 55 56 57 RM TOEB … PA1, PA2 33 When the door is closed the contact is closed 32 NO TOEA 24 V DC GND Mechanical contact 24 V DC 24 V DC … 31 TOE KB NA night mode … COM Pluggable drip loop 8-pole GND in X1 IQ AUT … 24 V DC X5 12 COM release X2 24 COM cylinder contact X8 AUT automatic … Day / night mode DO hold open … 24 V DC … 5 Release … 1 … GND … 24 V DC GND 24V DC RS 485-A RS 485-B SCR PA2 PA1B PA1A 24V DC GND PA1, PA2 RM TOEB TOEA 24 V DC GND TOE Mechanical contact 24 V DC KB 24 V DC NA night mode AUT automatic DO hold open PS … 2 24V DC PS 42 42 RS 485-A X6 41 41 RS 485-B … 24 V DC in 43 RS 485 43 SCR … GND in DCU2, control Slimdrive EMD passive leaf RS 485 DCU2, control Slimdrive EMD active leaf X7 MST 210 57 56 55 … 1 33 32 31 … 1 20 … 2 … 8 … NO COM Push button / access control / SCT IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 51 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock AUT with TSA160 NT (-F, -I) and activation X X Follow the mechanical installation instructions for IQ lock. Heed the wiring diagram for TSA160 NT, TSA160 NT-F, TSA160 NT Invers. Disconnect the internal programme switch of the door drive. With 2-leaf door drives connect the control unit to the active leaf. Set the parameters on the DCU5 control unit as follows: X With DPS: à Set parameter rr (21)(bolt message) to 02 (normally closed contact) and to (20) (electric strike type) to 03 (motor lock). X With ST220: à Set Input signals Ž Bolt message to electric strike. à Set Door parameters Ž Electric strike type to motor lock. Voltage supply of the MST 210 from separate power supply NT … -24 or from the DCU5 control unit. The GND of DCU5 (terminal TOE no. 1) must be connected with the GND of the MST 210 (terminal X7 no. 1), even when a separate power supply is used. Voltage supply of the rod drive IQ AUT from separate 24 V DC … A power supply. The day function on the lock cannot be used with analogue programme switches (DPS / TPS / MPS). 52 … 24 V DC in IQ AUT RS 485-B 41 22 Unlocked GEZE BUS PK GR WH GN 21 COM 41 20 Output … (locked) BN YE … Release RD BU Pluggable drip loop 8-pole 42 … 24 V DC X5 … 1 RM TOEB TOEA 24 V DC GND 24 V DC NA night mode AUT automatic DO hold open 24 V DC in GND in NO When the door is closed the contact is closed X1 COM … 33 32 … 2 … Door contact (IN) 16 NO door handle … 24 V DC 17 COM door handle TOE 31 13 NO release … 8 … X5 12 COM release Door contact 25 NO cylinder contact X2 24 COM cylinder contact X8 Mechanical contact … Day/night mode 20 … 24 V DC PS KB … Release RM TOEB TOEA 24 V DC GND TOE 24 V DC NA night mode AUT automatic DO hold open PS Mechanical contact 24 V DC GND … 1 GND … 24 V DC 24 V DC 24V DC … 2 … RS 485-A 42 42 24V DC X6 RS 485-A KB SCR 43 41 RS 485-B … GND in RS 485 43 SCR + - DCU2, control TSA160 NT passive leaf X7 DCU2, control TSA160 NT active leaf RS 485 MST 210 24 V DC NT 33 32 31 … 1 … 6 … 9 20 … NO COM Push button / access control / SCT IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams 53 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … IQ lock AUT with Powerturn IS X X Follow the mechanical installation instructions for IQ lock AUT. Heed the Powerturn wiring diagram. Parameters DCU8xx à Set configurable output … to day/night mode switchover: à DPS: Set a1 to … 8 (mode of operation message “Day/night mode”). à ST220: Set “PA1 function” to “Day/night mode switchover”. à Set bolt message contact type to normally closed contact: à DPS: Set ®® to … 2 (normally closed contact). à ST220: Set the “Signals”, “Input signals”, “Bolt contact type”, “Bolt contact type” to “NC”. à Set the electric strike type to motor lock: à DPS: Set TO to … 3 . à ST220: Set “Door parameters” “Electric strike type” to “Motor lock”. Power supply à Take the voltage supply MST 210 from a separate power supply or from the DCU8xx control unit. à Take the voltage supply rod drive (IQ AUT) from a separate power supply. Abbreviation on illustration on page Page 55 OHS HS DPS IQ AUT IQ lock EL (DL) KÜ MST 210 NT SCT xxx TK Component Opposite hinge side Hinge side Display programme switch Rod drive Self-locking motor lock with panic function (2-leaf) Drip loop Motor lock control Power supply Key switch Door contact Cable recommendation No. … 2 … 4 … 10  54 Power cable NYM-J 3x … J-Y (ST)Y 2×2× … J-Y (ST)Y 3×2× … J-Y (ST)Y 4×2× … Empty pipe inner diameter 10 mm Supplied by GEZE: à IQ lock XX 10 m LiYY 12× … mm² à IQ AUT 10 m LiYY 8× … mm² à TK (ID:106133) 6m LiYY 4× … mm² à K600 5m FRNC-LSIHSI FE90 on site IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Wiring diagrams … 230 V/ 50Hz … Radar BS … 1 VT #NT #MST 210 … Radar BGS 10 Powerturn … Powerturn IS TK … 10 … 9 10 10 … 9 KÜ KÜ KÜ IQ AUT 10 KÜ IQ lock EL-DL DPS SCT Reference to previous page 55 Wiring diagrams IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL DCU802/Powerturn (GF) SIS KB 10 TST 24 V DC … 4 24VSens Mechanical contact 20 … GND KI 11 SIS KI 21 COM 24VSens … NO GND … SIO 13 SIO … GND KA … 14VSens GND 10 TST Acvaon inside … Acvaon outside COM 24VSens … RSZ/DCU801(optional) KA 23 61 RSZ GND TOE 63 2nd drive GND … 62 RSZ 24V DC TOEB 32 … 24 V DC 27 61 RSZ GND TOEA 31 … Release 28 … GND RM 33 … 24 V DC … BU … 24V DC 24 V DC … 4 Day / night mode 31 PK 32 GY RS485 PS NO X6 Mode of opera on (IN) X2 Outputs COM day/ Night mode NO day/night mode X1 Lock 43 SCR DO … 10 41 RS485-B AU … 11 42 RS485-A LS … 12 COM release 35 BN … 24 V DC NA … 13 NO release 36 WH … GND OFF … 14 24V DC … 15 PE … GND PA … 24V DC GND 51 PE1 52 PE2 53 PE3 … 24VSens COM fault/ Alarm NC fault/ Alarm 16 NO door handle … 17 COM Door handle 24V DC … 18 COM door status PA1A 55 19 NO door status PA1B 56 PA2 57 20 COM RSK 21 NO RSK 95 Free Free 95 96 Free Free 96 … 97 Free Free 97 … 98 Free Free 98 … 24 V DC … GND YE 34 GN 37 VT 38 RD/BU 39 GY/PK J1 … 2 … 4 X4 Smoke detector (IN) X11 27 X13 X10 Cover mon. (OUT) 24 COM Cylinder con. 25 NO cylinder con. X7 Power supply DCU802/Powerturn (SF) SIS 33 X3 RSK (OUT) Free Free/DCU800 KB X9 28 X12 27 BK 28 RD TPF … GND in … 24 V DC in 10 TST 24 V DC … 4 24VSens Mechanical contact 20 … GND KI 11 SIS KI 21 X5 Door contact (IN) 24VSens … 24 V DC … COM … Door contact (IN) … NO SIO 13 SIO GND … GND KA … 14VSens GND 10 TST 24VSens … RSZ/DCU801(optional) KA 23 61 RSZ GND TOE 63 2nd drive TOEB 62 RSZ 24V DC 61 RSZ GND … 2 X8 Cyl.con./sabo (OUT) 24 COM Cylinder con. 25 NO cylinder con. Door contact … + NT 2,5A-24V - L 32 + N TOEA 31 - GND … GND RM 33 24V DC 24 V DC … 43 SCR GND … 41 RS485-B 24V DC … 42 RS485-A PA1A 55 … 24 V DC PA1B 56 … GND PA2 57 RS485 PA PE KÜ 8-pole X1 BU … GND RD … 24 V DC in … 24 V DC out BN … Release WH 20 Lckd. GR 21 COM 22 Unlckd. PK PS … GND DO … 2 24V DC AU … 51 PE1 LS … 52 PE2 NA … 53 PE3 OFF … 4 24VSens 24V DC … Free Free/DCU800 95 Free Free 95 96 Free Free 96 97 Free Free 97 98 Free Free 98 … 24 V DC … GND Drive 56 Cables IQ lock MST 210 VT IQ AUT X5 YE 42 RS485-A GN 41 RS485-B IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … What if? What if? X You can remedy most of the problems and faults which occur in day-to-day operation yourself. The following overview should help you with this. If you cannot find the reason for a fault or remedy it, please contact GEZE. Never open the lock casing yourself. à Installation and maintenance work or repairs may only be carried out by the manufacturer and their authorised specialists. à Improper installation and maintenance work or repairs can lead to considerable risk for the user or the product for which the manufacturer neither accepts liability nor provides a warranty. X Rod drive IQ AUT Alarm/fault OVR_TEMP Wh_L_ON Wh_UL1_ON Wh_UL2_ON Bar_L_ON Bar_UL_ON Wh_L_OFF Wh_UL1_OFF Wh_UL2_OFF Cause Consequence Remedial action X Return to GEZE Service. Temperature at the motor Poss. short-circuit at the too high. motor. X Acknowledge fault and test The Hall sensor at the locking à WH lock Hall sensor is position of the toothed wheel defective. again. cannot be activated. à Toothed wheel is blocked. If the fault occurs again: X Return to GEZE Service. The fault is only triggered during retraction. The first Hall sensor at the à The drive rod at the door X Unlock the passive leaf manuunlocking position of the edge is blocked. ally. Check whether excessive toothed wheel cannot be à Toothed wheel is blocked. force must be used for unlockactivated. à The face plate of the strike ing. X Make sure that the drive rod is The fault is only triggered box is blocked. during electric unlocking. not blocked. X Check whether the door has The Hall sensor at the locked à Attempted tampering. position of the drive bar is Some has tried to generbeen manipulated. X Leave the voltage switched off active in the unlocked state. ate a locked signal. This fault is only triggered in à The bar lock Hall sensor is for 10 sec and then switch it the unlocked state. defective. back on again. X Make sure that the drive rod is The Hall sensor at the unà Drive pin is defective. locked position of the drive à Drive rod is blocked. not blocked. X Check the load on the drive rod bar cannot be activated à Magnet of the drive rod during unlocking. has failed. manually. X Acknowledge fault and test This fault is only triggered during electric unlocking. again. X Acknowledge fault and test The Hall sensor at the locked Toothed wheel blocked. position of the toothed again. wheel remains active during If the fault occurs again: X Return to GEZE Service. unlocking. This fault is only triggered during electric unlocking. X Acknowledge fault and test The Hall sensor at the locked Toothed wheel blocked. position of the toothed again. wheel remains active during If the fault occurs again: X Return to GEZE Service. retraction. This fault is only triggered during retraction. X Acknowledge fault and test The Hall sensor at the locked Toothed wheel blocked. position of the toothed again. wheel remains active during If the fault occurs again: X Return to GEZE Service. retraction. This fault is only triggered during retraction. 57 What if? IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Alarm/fault Bar_L_OFF OC_2UL OC_2UL_BAR OC_2L Cause Consequence The Hall sensor at the locked à Drive rod is blocked. position of the drive bar à Bar lock sensor is defecremains active during untive. locking. This fault is only triggered in the unlocked state. “OverCurrent to unlock” Toothed wheel blocked. The max. current limit has been exceeded during unlocking, although the drive bar has already reached the unlocked position. “OverCurrent to unlock” à Drive bar or toothed The max. current limit has wheel is blocked. been exceeded during unà The load is too high locking. “OverCurrent to lock” The current limit has been exceeded during locking. Toothed wheel blocked. Remedial action X Make sure that the drive rod is not blocked. X Check the load on the drive rod manually. X Acknowledge fault and test again. X Acknowledge fault and test again. If the fault occurs again: X Return to GEZE Service. Make sure that the drive rod is not blocked. X Check the load on the drive rod manually. X Acknowledge fault and test again. X Acknowledge fault and test again. If the fault occurs again: X Return to GEZE Service. X Motor lock IQ lock EL / IQ lock EL DL Alarm/fault Cause Manual unlocking of the Mechanical fault on the lock or lock using panic device bolt jammed in extended state possible, but not using motor actuation Connector cable defective Consequence Remedial action Bolt can no longer be re- X Reset the activation and start tracted by motor, and/or activation of the lock again, error message is pending error message will go out if at the control unit successful. X Check continuity and replace Lock is not being supplied with 24 V DC the connector cable of the lock if necessary. Control unit is not being supplied In the event of attempt- X Check the polarity of the 24 V with 24 V DC ed tampering, the bolt DC input on the control unit and of the auxiliary latch is change if necessary. closed and can no longer be retracted by motor The door can be pushed or The cross latch cannot be poBolt blocked in retracted X Position the strike plate correctly. X Check activation of the expulled open by hand sitioned or the lock cylinder is state jammed change function using the key. X Loosen the screws, lubricate the Door handle is jammed in actiThe door handle does vated position or handle return not return to its initial handle guide, correct mounting. spring is broken position after actuation The error message is reset once the The signal is sent via fault handle is mobilised again. relay after … min – or – X Replace the lock. Auxiliary latch is not actuated Bolt is not extended with X Check the clearance of the door door closed leaf and shim the strike plate if necessary. Lock in permanently unlocked Lock does not lock when X Check permanently unlocked mode the door is closed activation. Connector cable has been inter- Lock does not lock when X Check connector cable for contirupted during the release time the door is closed nuity. X Open the door and replace the The auxiliary latch closes with Strike plate has been reworked – door closed with “Off” and hollowed out too much strike plate. 58 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Alarm/fault No signal from the Reed contact Lock no longer locks Door leaf cannot close What if? Cause Consequence Remedial action Sensing distance of the Reed con- Electric sequential con- X Check Reed contact, sensing tact exceeded or connector cable trol is still working. distance observed? for the Reed contact defective Door locks during door X Check continuity, check input – or – closing process or reof external door contact on the Input external door contact mains locked when door control unit. on the control unit defective is closed. Door mode “door closed” is not signalled. Connector cable defective Bolt no longer extends X Replace connector cable. Cross latches hit the strike plate Door leaf cannot close, X Lubricate the cross latches lightly hard latches grind at the strike with a lubricant approved by plate GEZE. X Auxiliary latch can no longer be Mobilise the auxiliary catch operated carefully. Lever lock IQ lock EM / IQ lock EM DL Alarm/fault Manual unlocking via the outer door handle not possible Cause Magnet is not energised Consequence Outside handle is not engaged and is disabled The door can be pushed or pulled open by hand Cross latch cannot be positioned – or – Lock cylinder is jammed Bolt blocked in retracted state Door handle is jammed in The door handle does not activated position return to its initial position – or – after actuation and there is Handle return spring is no locking signal given broken Auxiliary latch is not actuated Lock does not lock when the door is closed Bolt shoots out again imme- Door handle has not been Face plate is not held in perdiately after the door has pressed down completely. manently unlocked position, been opened – or – door cannot close and be Auxiliary latch is jammed locked properly Remedial action X Check the polarity of the 24 V DC input and replace if necessary. – and/or – X Check the continuity of the connector cable. If the connector cable and polarity are both OK: X Replace the lock. X Position the strike plate correctly. – or – X Check activation of the exchange function using the key. X Loosen the screws, lubricate the handle guide, correct mounting. – or – X Replace the lock. Check the clearance of the door leaf. X Press the door handle as far as it will go. X Check the tension-free fit of the lock. Rework the lock recess if necessary. If there is no change in lock behaviour: X Replace the lock. X Open the door and replace the strike plate. X The auxiliary latch closes with Strike plate has been re– door closed with “Off” worked and hollowed out too much Door leaf cannot close Cross latches hit the strike Door leaf cannot close, latch- X Lubricate the cross latches lightly plate hard es grind at the strike plate with a lubricant approved by GEZE. X Mobilise the auxiliary catch Auxiliary latch can no longer – be operated carefully. Contacts are not signalling Fittings set installed twisted Contacts in the lock are not X Remove the fittings set. – or – activated by the integrated X Check the tension-free fit of the Lock case fitted in the recess face plate lock. X Rework the lock recess if under mechanical tension necessary, mobilise the lock or replace the lock. X Check connector cable through Connector cable is defective Relaying of contacts not possible or replace lock. 59 What if? IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL Mechanical contact lock IQ lock C / IQ lock C DL and mechanical lock IQ lock M / IQ lock M DL Alarm/fault The door can be pushed or pulled open by hand Consequence Remedial action X Position the strike plate corBolt blocked in retracted state rectly. X Check activation of the exBolt blocked in retracted state change function using the key. X Loosen the screws. Door handle is jammed in The door handle does not activated position return to its original position X Lubricate the handle guide. X Correct mounting – or – after actuation Handle return spring is – or – X Replace the lock. broken Auxiliary latch is not actuated Lock does not lock when the X Check the clearance of the door door is closed leaf. Bolt shoots out again imme- Door handle has not been Face plate is not held in per- X Press the handle down as far as diately after the door has pressed down completely manently unlocked position, it will go X Check the tension-free fit of the been opened – or – door cannot close and be Auxiliary latch is jammed in locked properly lock. X Rework the lock recess if necactivated position essary. If there is no change in lock behaviour: X Replace the lock. X Open the door and replace the The auxiliary latch closes with Strike plate has been re– door closed with “Off” worked and hollowed out too strike plate. much Door leaf cannot Cross latches hit the strike Door leaf cannot close, latch- X Lubricate the cross latches lightly close plate hard es grind at the strike plate with a lubricant approved by – or – GEZE. X Mobilise the auxiliary catch Auxiliary latch can no longer be operated carefully. 60 Cause Cross latch cannot be positioned Lock cylinder is jammed IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL … Maintenance Maintenance Lock maintenance work must be carried out once a year by GEZE or an authorised GEZE partner. Maintenance instructions These maintenance instructions are part of the installation and operating instructions and have to be made available to the owner/operator of the building. In addition, we recommend monthly checks on the locks by the owner/operator as follows: à Make sure by inspecting and actuating the emergency exit device that all parts of the lock are in a satisfactory operating conditions. à Use a dynamometer to measure and record the operating forces required to release the panic door/escape door lock. à Ensure that the operating forces have not changed substantially in comparison to the operating forces recorded during initial commissioning. à Ensure that bolt heads or keepers are not blocked or clogged up. à Ensure that the panic exit device has been lubricated according to the manufacturer's instructions and that the operating element has been tightened properly. à Ensure that no additional locking devices are added to the door after initial installation. à Check whether all the components of the panic exit device still comply with the list of approved components originally supplied with the system. à Ensure that these documents are made available to the owner/operator of the panic exit device/escape door lock. 61 Maintenance 62 IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL IQ lock AUT, EL / EL DL, EM / EM DL, C / C DL, M / M DL  63 Germany GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 594 E-Mail: leonberg.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Süd-Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6440 E-Mail: muenchen.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Ost Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6840 E-Mail: berlin.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Mitte/Luxemburg Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6888 E-Mail: frankfurt.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung West Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6770 E-Mail: duesseldorf.de@geze.com GEZE GmbH Niederlassung Nord Tel. +49 (0) 7152 203 6600 E-Mail: hamburg.de@geze.com GEZE Service GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 1802 923392 E-Mail: service-info.de@geze.com Austria GEZE Austria E-Mail: austria.at@geze.com www.geze.at Hungary GEZE Hungary Kft. E-Mail: office-hungary@geze.com www.geze.hu Scandinavia – Sweden GEZE Scandinavia AB E-Mail: sverige.se@geze.com www.geze.se Baltic States – Lithuania / Latvia / Estonia E-Mail: baltic-states@geze.com Iberia GEZE Iberia S.R.L. E-Mail: info.es@geze.com www.geze.es Scandinavia – Norway GEZE Scandinavia AB avd. Norge E-Mail: norge.se@geze.com www.geze.no Benelux GEZE Benelux B.V. E-Mail: benelux.nl@geze.com www.geze.be www.geze.nl India GEZE India Private Ltd. E-Mail: office-india@geze.com www.geze.in Scandinavia – Denmark GEZE Danmark E-Mail: danmark.se@geze.com www.geze.dk Bulgaria GEZE Bulgaria - Trade E-Mail: office-bulgaria@geze.com www.geze.bg Italy GEZE Italia S.r.l. Unipersonale E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it Singapore GEZE (Asia Pacific) Pte, Ltd. E-Mail: gezesea@geze.com.sg www.geze.com China GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Engineering Roma S.r.l E-Mail: italia.it@geze.com www.geze.it South Africa GEZE South Africa (Pty) Ltd. E-Mail: info@gezesa.co.za www.geze.co.za GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Shanghai E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Guangzhou E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn GEZE Industries (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Branch Office Beijing E-Mail: chinasales@geze.com.cn www.geze.com.cn France GEZE France S.A.R.L. E-Mail: france.fr@geze.com www.geze.fr Korea GEZE Korea Ltd. E-Mail: info.kr@geze.com www.geze.com Poland GEZE Polska Sp.z o.o. E-Mail: geze.pl@geze.com www.geze.pl Romania GEZE Romania S.R.L. E-Mail: office-romania@geze.com www.geze.ro Russia OOO GEZE RUS E-Mail: office-russia@geze.com www.geze.ru Switzerland GEZE Schweiz AG E-Mail: schweiz.ch@geze.com www.geze.ch Türkiye GEZE Kapı ve Pencere Sistemleri E-Mail: office-turkey@geze.com www.geze.com Ukraine LLC GEZE Ukraine E-Mail: office-ukraine@geze.com www.geze.ua United Arab Emirates/GCC GEZE Middle East E-Mail: gezeme@geze.com www.geze.ae United Kingdom GEZE UK Ltd. E-Mail: info.uk@geze.com www.geze.com GEZE GmbH Reinhold-Vöster-Straße 21–29 71229 Leonberg Germany Tel.: 0049 7152 203 … Fax.: 0049 7152 203 310 www.geze.com